3HE12096AAABTQZZA01 - V1 - 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide Release 19.7

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide
7950 Extensible Routing

System
7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40

Chassis Installation Guide
3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA
Edition: 01
August 2019
Nokia — Proprietary and confidential.

Use pursuant to applicable agreements..
7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company

names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective
owners.
All specifications, procedures, and information in this document are subject to

change and revision at any time without notice. The information contained herein is
believed to be accurate as of the date of publication. Nokia provides no warranty,
express or implied, regarding its contents. Users are fully responsible for application
or use of the documentation.
© 2019 Nokia. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must
not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside Nokia without its
written authorization. Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with
applicable agreements.
2 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

Installation Guide
Table of Contents
1 Preface............................................................................ 19
1.1 Warnings and Notes .................................................................. 20
1.2 Audience.................................................................................... 20
1.3 Symbols and Labels .................................................................. 20
1.4 Technical Support...................................................................... 21
2 Regulatory and Customer Requirements .................... 23

2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards and Certifications ............... 23
2.2 List of Terms.............................................................................. 25
2.3 General Requirements .............................................................. 27
2.3.1 Dangers and Warnings.............................................................. 27
2.3.2 Antistatic Measures ................................................................... 28
2.3.2.1 Grounding.................................................................................. 29
2.3.3 Interconnection Points ............................................................... 29
2.3.3.1 SELV ......................................................................................... 29
2.3.3.2 TNV2 ......................................................................................... 29
2.3.3.3 Primary ...................................................................................... 29
2.3.4 Laser Interface .......................................................................... 30
2.3.5 Protective Safety Ground (Earth) .............................................. 30
2.3.6 EMC Compliance....................................................................... 30
2.3.7 Regulatory Symbols .................................................................. 30
2.4 Safety Approvals ....................................................................... 32
2.5 Safety Approval for External DC Sources ................................ 32
2.6 Canada Regulations .................................................................. 33
2.6.1 Industry Canada Regulations .................................................... 33
2.6.2 EMC Compliance....................................................................... 33
2.6.3 Safety Approval for DC Systems ............................................... 33
2.7 United States Regulations ......................................................... 34
2.7.1 Federal Communications Commission...................................... 34
2.7.2 NRTL ......................................................................................... 34
2.7.3 NRTL Approval for External DC Supplies.................................. 35
2.7.5 Food and Drug Administration................................................... 35
2.8 European Union Regulations..................................................... 36
2.8.1 Declaration of Conformity .......................................................... 36
2.8.2 EU Compliance Statement ........................................................ 36
2.8.3 EMC/EMI Compliance ............................................................... 36
2.8.4 General...................................................................................... 36
2.8.5 Laser Interface........................................................................... 37
2.8.7 Protective Earth ........................................................................ 37
2.8.8 Approval for External AC Rectifiers ........................................... 37
2.8.9 Eco-Environmental ................................................................... 38
2.8.10 Material Content Compliance .................................................... 39
2.9 Australia/New Zealand Regulations .......................................... 40
Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 3

Installation Guide
2.9.1 ACMA Regulations .................................................................... 40

2.10 China Regulations ..................................................................... 41
2.10.1 Safety ........................................................................................ 41
2.10.2 Packaging Collection and Recovery Requirements .................. 41
2.10.3 Material Content Compliance .................................................... 41
2.10.4 Altitude Limit .............................................................................. 42
2.11 South Korea Regulations........................................................... 43
2.12 Japan Regulations..................................................................... 44
2.12.1 Safety ........................................................................................ 44
2.12.2 EMC........................................................................................... 44
3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

3.1 System Description.................................................................... 47
3.1.1 System Architecture .................................................................. 49
3.1.1.1 Switching Plane ......................................................................... 49
3.1.1.2 Forwarding Plane ...................................................................... 50
3.1.1.3 Control Plane............................................................................. 51
3.1.2 Front Chassis Layout................................................................. 51
3.1.3 Rear Chassis Layout ................................................................. 54
3.2 Chassis Common Components................................................. 59
3.2.1 Advanced Power EQualization and Control Modules................ 59
3.2.1.1 APEQ-DC-4275 ......................................................................... 60
3.2.1.2 AC/HVDC Chassis APEQs........................................................ 61
3.2.1.3 Minimum Power Requirements ................................................. 66
3.2.1.4 Input Power Feed Redundancy ................................................ 66
3.2.2 Power Connection Panel ........................................................... 69
3.2.2.1 PIMs .......................................................................................... 70
3.2.2.2 PCMs......................................................................................... 71
3.2.2.3 Power Cabling ........................................................................... 72
3.2.2.4 Ground Cabling ......................................................................... 72
3.2.3 Cooling System ......................................................................... 73
3.2.3.1 Air Flow...................................................................................... 73
3.2.3.2 Impeller Fan Trays..................................................................... 75
3.2.3.3 PCM Fans.................................................................................. 76
3.2.3.4 Air Filters ................................................................................... 78
3.2.4 Impedance Panels..................................................................... 81
3.2.5 Cable Management System ...................................................... 82
3.3 Control and Management .......................................................... 82
3.3.1 Chassis Control Modules........................................................... 83
3.3.1.1 Managing 7950 XRS-40 Extension Chassis.............................. 86
3.3.1.2 Minimum Requirements............................................................. 86
3.3.2 Control Processing Modules...................................................... 86
3.4 Switching ................................................................................... 88
3.4.1 Switch Fabric Modules .............................................................. 88
3.4.1.1 Standalone SFM-X20S-B .......................................................... 89
3.4.1.2 Standalone SFM2-X20S............................................................ 90
3.4.1.3 Multi-chassis Capable SFM....................................................... 91

Installation Guide
3.4.2 XCMs......................................................................................... 92
3.5 Forwarding................................................................................. 94
3.5.1 C-XMAs/XMAs........................................................................... 94
3.5.1.1 C-XMAs ..................................................................................... 95
3.5.1.2 XMAs ......................................................................................... 99
4 Intelligent Power Management ................................... 111

4.1 Overview.................................................................................. 111
4.1.1 Configurable Priorities ............................................................. 111
4.1.2 Power Capacity and Requirement........................................... 112
4.2 Operating Modes ..................................................................... 114
4.2.1 None ........................................................................................ 114
4.2.2 Basic........................................................................................ 114
4.2.3 Advanced................................................................................. 115
4.2.4 Power Safety Level.................................................................. 115
4.2.5 Power Safety Alert................................................................... 116
4.2.6 Sample Scenario ..................................................................... 117
4.3 Provisioning APEQs ................................................................ 120
4.3.1 Provisioning Rules................................................................... 120
4.4 Alarms ..................................................................................... 122
4.4.1 Minor Alarm-Level Condition ................................................... 122
4.4.2 Major Alarm-Level Condition ................................................... 123
4.4.3 Critical Alarm-Level Condition ................................................. 124
4.5 Provisioning and Activating XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs......... 125
4.5.1 Shutting Down XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs ............................ 125
4.5.2 Power-save Mode.................................................................... 125
4.5.2.1 Setting Power-save Mode ....................................................... 126
4.5.2.2 Disabling Power-save Mode.................................................... 127
5 System Specifications................................................. 129

5.1 Chassis Specifications............................................................. 129
5.1.1 Physical Chassis Specifications .............................................. 129
5.2 Physical Component Specifications ........................................ 130
5.3 Environmental Specifications .................................................. 132
5.4 System Power Specifications .................................................. 133
5.4.1 Calculating the Component Power Consumption ................... 133
5.4.2 Power Consumption Values .................................................... 134
5.4.3 Component Power Consumption............................................. 134
5.4.4 APEQ Electrical Specifications................................................ 137
5.4.5 APEQ Requirement Calculations ........................................... 139

Installation Guide
6 Site Preparation ........................................................... 141

6.1 Warnings and Notes ................................................................ 141
6.2 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Separation Guidelines......................... 143
6.3 Equipment Rack Specifications ............................................... 145
6.3.1 Chassis Dimensions ................................................................ 145
6.3.1.1 Chassis Diagrams ................................................................... 146
6.3.2 Rack Clearance Requirements................................................ 157
6.3.2.1 Cabinet Clearance Requirements ........................................... 157
6.3.3 Required tools ......................................................................... 157
6.4 Safety Considerations ............................................................. 158
6.4.1 Placement................................................................................ 158
6.4.2 Grounding................................................................................ 159
6.4.3 Cabling .................................................................................... 159
6.4.4 Power ...................................................................................... 160
6.4.5 Impeller Fan Trays................................................................... 160
6.4.6 Air Filters ................................................................................. 161
6.4.7 Storage .................................................................................... 161
6.5 Installation Locations ............................................................... 162
6.6 Installation Site Assessment ................................................... 163
6.6.1 Geographical Location............................................................. 163
6.6.2 Installation Site Type ............................................................... 164
6.6.2.1 Room ....................................................................................... 164
6.6.2.2 Cabinet .................................................................................... 165
6.6.3 Site Influences ......................................................................... 166
6.6.4 Site Assessment Checklists .................................................... 166
6.6.4.1 Seasonal Influences ................................................................ 167
6.6.4.2 Local Risk Factors ................................................................... 167
6.6.4.3 Specific Characteristics of the Installation Site........................ 169
7 Installing and Grounding the Chassis ....................... 171

7.1 Warnings and Notes ................................................................ 171
7.2 Unloading the Chassis............................................................. 173
7.3 Installing CCMs ....................................................................... 179
7.4 Rack Mounting the Chassis..................................................... 180
7.4.1 Installing the Chassis............................................................... 181
7.5 Making the Chassis Ground Connection ................................. 185
7.5.1 Attaching the Fan Bay Door Ground Strap ............................. 186
7.5.2 Preparing the Chassis Ground Wire........................................ 187
7.5.3 Making the Chassis Ground Wire Connection......................... 187
7.6 Attaching PIM Slot ID Brackets ............................................... 189
7.7 Installing PCM Fans ................................................................ 190
7.8 Completing the Installation ...................................................... 191
7.8.1 Component Operating Requirements...................................... 192
8 Installing APEQs and Connecting Power ................. 195

8.1 General Power Warnings and Notes ....................................... 195
8.2 APEQ Slot Numbers................................................................ 196
8.3 Installing DC APEQs for Universal Chassis ............................ 197
8.3.1 Installing 4275W APEQ ........................................................... 197

Installation Guide
8.3.2 Connecting DC Power ............................................................. 198

8.3.2.1 DC Power Warnings and Notes............................................... 199
8.3.2.2 Preparing Input Power Wiring.................................................. 200
8.3.2.3 PIM Terminal Block Wiring ...................................................... 201
8.4 Installing HVDC APEQs .......................................................... 206
8.5 Connecting HVDC Power ........................................................ 207
8.5.1 HVDC Power Cords................................................................. 207
8.5.2 Connecting and Routing HVDC Power Cords ......................... 209
8.6 Installing AC APEQs................................................................ 211
8.7 Connecting AC Power ............................................................. 213
8.7.1 AC Power Cords...................................................................... 213
8.7.2 Connecting and Routing AC Power Cords .............................. 215
9 Installing CPMs and SFMs .......................................... 217

9.1 Installing CPMs........................................................................ 218
9.2 Installing SFMs ........................................................................ 221
9.2.1 Configure SFMs....................................................................... 223
9.2.1.1 Setting Fabric Speed ............................................................... 224
9.2.2 Minimum Requirements........................................................... 225
10 Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs ........................... 227

10.1 Configuring Parameters........................................................... 227
10.1.1 Configure Chassis Slot and XCM Parameters ........................ 227
10.1.1.1 Setting Fabric Speed ............................................................... 228
10.1.2 Configure C-XMA/XMA Parameters ........................................ 229
10.2 FP4-based Card Licensing ...................................................... 231
10.2.1 Overview.................................................................................. 231
10.2.1.1 Hardware Capacity .................................................................. 231
10.2.1.2 Hardware Functionality............................................................ 232
10.2.2 Building Blocks of Licensing .................................................... 232
10.2.2.1 Connectors .............................................................................. 232
10.2.2.2 E4 Chipset ............................................................................... 232
10.2.2.3 P4 Chipset ............................................................................... 232
10.2.2.4 Base Card................................................................................ 233
10.2.3 Hardware Functional Level Licenses....................................... 233
10.2.3.1 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA................................................... 233
10.2.3.2 1-complex 6-port CFP2-DCO XMA ......................................... 235
10.2.3.3 2-complex 24-port QSFP28 XMA ............................................ 236
10.2.3.4 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA.......................................... 239
10.2.4 Card Activation ........................................................................ 242
10.2.4.1 Provisioning Spare Cards........................................................ 242
10.3 XCM and C-XMAs/XMA Operational Dependencies............... 243
10.4 Installing XCMs........................................................................ 244
10.4.1 Removing Impedance Panels.................................................. 245
10.4.2 Inserting XCMs into a Chassis ................................................ 247
10.5 Installing C-XMAs/XMAs ......................................................... 248
10.5.1 Installing C-XMAs into a Chassis ............................................ 249
10.5.2 Installing XMAs into a Chassis ................................................ 251

Installation Guide
11 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling ..................... 253

11.1 Rear Cable Guides .................................................................. 253
11.2 Switch Fabric Connections ...................................................... 257
11.2.1 Cable Routing.......................................................................... 260
11.2.2 Switch Fabric Monitoring ......................................................... 262
11.2.2.1 Startup Diagnostics ................................................................. 262
11.2.2.2 On-Demand Diagnostics ......................................................... 262
11.2.2.3 SFM Link Failure Behavior ...................................................... 266
11.3 Control Plane Connections...................................................... 267
11.3.1 CPM Link Failure Behavior...................................................... 268
11.3.2 CPM Failure/Switchover Behavior........................................... 270
11.4 Timing and Frequency Synchronization .................................. 271
12 Establishing Router Connections .............................. 275

12.1 Console Connection ................................................................ 275
12.2 Remote Access ....................................................................... 277
12.2.1 SSH Connection ...................................................................... 277
12.2.2 Telnet Connection ................................................................... 278
12.2.2.1 Running Telnet ........................................................................ 278
13 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up ................................. 279

13.1 Powering Up the System ......................................................... 279
13.2 System Boot-up ....................................................................... 279
13.2.1 Initial System Boot-up.............................................................. 280
13.2.2 Troubleshooting....................................................................... 280
14 7950 XRS-40 System Bring-Up ................................... 283

14.1 System Migration and Bring-up Procedure.............................. 283
14.1.1 Criteria for Migrating 7950 XRS-20e to 7950 XRS-40............. 287
14.1.2 Reverting to Separate 7950 XRS-20e Routers ....................... 288
14.2 System Boot-up ....................................................................... 289
14.3 Recovery of an Isolated Extension Chassis ............................ 291
15 LEDs.............................................................................. 293
15.1 CCM LEDs............................................................................... 294
15.1.1 Status LED .............................................................................. 295
15.1.2 Temperature LED .................................................................... 295
15.1.3 Critical/Major Alarm LEDs ....................................................... 296
15.1.4 Minor Alarm LEDs ................................................................... 296
15.1.5 OES Ports LEDs...................................................................... 296
15.1.6 Management Port LEDs .......................................................... 297
15.1.7 BITS Port LEDs ....................................................................... 297
15.1.8 CF Status LEDs....................................................................... 298
15.2 CPM LEDs............................................................................... 299
15.3 SFM LEDs ............................................................................... 301
15.3.1 Standalone SFM LED.............................................................. 301
15.3.2 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LEDs ........................................... 302
15.4 XCM LED................................................................................. 303

Installation Guide
15.5 C-XMA/XMA LEDs .................................................................. 304

15.5.1 LEDs for Single-port Connectors............................................. 304
15.5.2 LEDs for Multi-port Breakout Connectors................................ 305
15.5.2.1 Blink Sequence........................................................................ 306
15.6 APEQ LEDs............................................................................. 308
15.7 PCM LEDs............................................................................... 312
15.7.1 Dual PCM LEDs ...................................................................... 312
15.7.2 Quad PCM LEDs ..................................................................... 313
15.8 Fan Tray LEDs ........................................................................ 314
15.8.1 Ring LED ................................................................................. 315
15.9 PCM Fan LED ......................................................................... 315
16 Field-Replaceable Units .............................................. 317

16.1 Air Filters ................................................................................. 318
16.1.1 Removing and Replacing the CCM Air Filter........................... 318
16.1.2 Removing and Replacing the XCM Air Filter ........................... 319
16.1.3 Removing and Replacing the Main System Air Filter .............. 320
16.1.3.1 Removing the Air Filter Drawer ............................................... 321
16.1.3.2 Removing and Replacing the Filter Element ........................... 321
16.1.4 Removing and Replacing the APEQ Air Filter ......................... 323
16.2 CPMs....................................................................................... 324
16.2.1 Removing and Replacing CPMs.............................................. 325
16.3 SFMs ....................................................................................... 327
16.3.1 Removing and Replacing SFMs .............................................. 328
16.4 C-XMAs/XMAs......................................................................... 330
16.4.1 Shutting Down and Modifying Card Configuration................... 331
16.4.2 Removing and Replacing C-XMA............................................ 333
16.4.3 Removing and Replacing XMA................................................ 334
16.5 XCMs....................................................................................... 336
16.5.1 Shutting Down and Modifying Card Configuration................... 336
16.5.2 Removing and Replacing XCMs.............................................. 338
16.5.2.1 Installing an Impedance Panel ................................................ 339
16.5.2.2 Replacing an XCMs................................................................. 339
16.6 APEQs..................................................................................... 340
16.6.1 Removing and Replacing APEQs............................................ 342
16.7 PIMs and PCMs....................................................................... 343
16.7.1 Removing and Replacing PCMs.............................................. 343
16.7.2 Removing and Replacing PIMs ............................................... 345
16.8 Impeller Fan Trays................................................................... 348
16.8.1 Removing and Replacing an Impeller Fan Tray ...................... 348
16.9 PCM Fans................................................................................ 350
16.9.1 Removing and Replacing PCM Fans ...................................... 350
16.10 CCMs....................................................................................... 351
16.10.1 Removing and Replacing CCMs ............................................. 351
16.10.2 Ejecting Flash Cards ............................................................... 352
16.11 Cable Guides........................................................................... 353
16.11.1 Removing and Replacing Cable Guides.................................. 354
16.12 Protection Panels .................................................................... 354

Installation Guide
17 Pin Assignments.......................................................... 355

17.1 CCM Port Types ...................................................................... 355
17.1.1 OES Ports Pinout .................................................................... 356
17.1.2 BITS Cable Connector............................................................. 357
17.1.3 RS-232 - DTE Mode ................................................................ 358
17.1.4 RS-232 - DCE Mode................................................................ 358
17.1.5 Alarm Port Cable Connector.................................................... 359
17.1.6 Ethernet Management Cable Connector ................................. 360
18 Protection Panels ........................................................ 363

18.1 Before You Begin .................................................................... 363
18.1.1 Required Hardware And Tools ................................................ 363
18.2 Installing Front Protection Panels............................................ 363
18.2.1 Front Panel on 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40................... 364
18.3 Installing Rear Protection Panels ............................................ 368
18.3.1 Rear Panel on 7950 XRS-20e Chassis ................................... 368
18.3.2 Rear Panel on 7950 XRS-40 Chassis ..................................... 373

Installation Guide
List of Tables
1 Preface............................................................................ 19
Table 1 Information Symbols ................................................................ 20

Table 2 Safety Standards and Compliance Agency Certifications ........ 23
Table 3 List of Terms ............................................................................. 25
Table 4 Regulatory Symbols ................................................................. 31
3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

Table 5 Chassis Front View Features ................................................... 53
Table 6 Chassis Rear View Features .................................................... 57
Table 7 Available APEQ Variants........................................................... 59
Table 8 APEQ-DC-4275 Feature Descriptions ...................................... 60
Table 9 APEQ-HVDC-3000 Feature Descriptions ................................. 62
Table 10 APEQ-AC-3000 Feature Descriptions ...................................... 63
Table 11 APEQ-AC-4400 Feature Descriptions ...................................... 64
Table 12 APEQ-HVDC-4400 Feature Descriptions ................................. 65
Table 13 APEQ Variants that Support Dual PCMs .................................. 71
Table 14 Cooling System (Rear View) .................................................... 75
Table 15 CCM Features .......................................................................... 83
Table 16 CPM Features .......................................................................... 87
Table 17 Standalone SFM-X20S-B Features .......................................... 89
Table 18 Standalone SFM2-X20S Features ............................................ 90
Table 19 Multi-chassis Capable SFM Features ....................................... 91
Table 20 XCM Features .......................................................................... 93
Table 21 2-port 100 GE CFP C-XMA Features ....................................... 95
Table 22 20-port 10 GE SFP+ C-XMA Features ..................................... 96
Table 23 6-port 40 GE QSFP+ C-XMA Features .................................... 97
Table 24 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP C-XMA Features .................................. 98
Table 25 2-port 100 GE DWDM XMA Features .................................... 100
Table 26 4-port 100 GE CXP XMA Features ......................................... 101
Table 27 40-port 10 GE SFP+ XMA Features ....................................... 102
Table 28 4-port 100 GE CFP2 XMA Features ....................................... 103
Table 29 6-port 400 GE CFP8 XMA Features ....................................... 104
Table 30 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO XMA Features .............................. 105
Table 31 Universal 24-port QSFP28 XMA Features ............................. 106
Table 32 Supported Optical Devices ..................................................... 107
Table 33 Universal 12-port QSFP-DDXMA Features ............................ 108
Table 34 Supported Optical Devices ..................................................... 109

Installation Guide
5 System Specifications................................................. 129

Table 35 Physical Chassis Specifications ............................................. 129
Table 36 Physical Component Specifications ....................................... 130
Table 37 Environmental Specifications ................................................. 132
Table 38 Power Rating and Conditions ................................................ 134
Table 39 System Component Power Consumption Values in Watts ..... 134
Table 40 APEQ Electrical Specifications ............................................... 137

Table 41 Overall Chassis Dimensions ................................................... 145
Table 42 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions ...................... 148
Table 43 7950 XRS-20e AC Chassis Dimensions ................................ 150
Table 44 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels ... 152
Table 45 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions ........................ 154
Table 46 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels ..... 156
Table 47 Minimum Chassis Clearance Guidelines ................................ 157
Table 48 Storage Specifications............................................................. 161
Table 49 Seasonal Influences ................................................................ 167
Table 50 Local Risk Factors .................................................................. 167
Table 51 Specific Characteristics of the Installation Site ....................... 169

Table 52 Shipping Crate Dimensions .................................................... 173
Table 53 Chassis and Rack.................................................................... 182
Table 54 Brackets and Screws .............................................................. 185
Table 55 Fan Bay Door Ground Strap Features..................................... 186
Table 56 Ground Wire Descriptions ...................................................... 187
Table 57 Chassis Ground Features........................................................ 188
Table 58 Universal Accessory Kit .......................................................... 191
Table 59 AC/HVDC Accessory Kit ......................................................... 192
Table 60 Component Operating Requirements Summary .................... 192

Table 61 4275W APEQ Features .......................................................... 198
Table 62 DC Power Cable ..................................................................... 201
Table 63 HVDC APEQ Features ............................................................ 206
Table 64 T-Latch HVDC Power Cord Connector Features .................... 208
Table 65 HVDC Power Cords................................................................. 208
Table 66 AC APEQ Features ................................................................. 211
Table 67 AC Power Cords...................................................................... 213
Table 68 T-Latch AC Power Cord Connector Features.......................... 214

Installation Guide

Table 69 CPM Features ........................................................................ 220
Table 70 SFM Features.......................................................................... 222

Table 71 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA Part Numbers List .................... 233
Table 72 2-complex 6-port CFP8 Upgrade Licenses ............................ 235
Table 73 1-complex 6-port CFP2-DCO Part Numbers List ................... 235
Table 74 1-complex 1.2T 6-port CFP2-DCO Upgrade Licenses ........... 236
Table 75 2-complex 24-port QSFP28 XMA Part Number List ............... 236
Table 76 2-complex 2.4T 24-port QSFP28 Upgrade Licenses .............. 239
Table 77 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA Part Number List ............. 239
Table 78 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD Upgrade Licenses ................... 241
Table 79 Impedance Panel Features .................................................... 246
Table 80 C-XMA Features ..................................................................... 250
Table 81 XMA Features ......................................................................... 251
12 Establishing Router Connections .............................. 275

Table 82 Console Configuration Parameter Values .............................. 275
15 LEDs.............................................................................. 293
Table 83 CCM LEDs .............................................................................. 294
Table 84 Standalone/Master Status LED Behavior ............................... 295
Table 85 Extension Status LED Behavior ............................................. 295
Table 86 Temp LED Behavior ............................................................... 295
Table 87 Critical/Major Alarm LED Behavior ......................................... 296
Table 88 Minor Alarm LE Behavior ........................................................ 296
Table 89 OES Port LED Behavior ......................................................... 296
Table 90 Management Port LED Behavior ............................................ 297
Table 91 BITS Port LED Behavior ......................................................... 297
Table 92 CF Status LED Behavior ........................................................ 298
Table 93 Standalone/Master CPM LED Behavior ................................. 299
Table 94 Extension CPM LED Behavior ............................................... 300
Table 95 Standalone SFM LED Behavior .............................................. 301
Table 96 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LED Behavior ............................. 302
Table 97 XCM LED Behavior ................................................................ 303
Table 98 C-XMA/XMA Single-Port LEDs Behavior ............................... 304
Table 99 XMA Multi-Port Breakout LEDs Behavior ............................... 305
Table 100 APEQ LED Behavior .............................................................. 308
Table 101 Dual PCM LED Behavior ........................................................ 312
Table 102 Quad PCM LED Behavior ....................................................... 313
Table 103 Fan Status LED Behavior ....................................................... 314
Table 104 PCM Fan LED Behavior ......................................................... 315

Installation Guide

Table 105 Filter Drawer Features ............................................................ 321
Table 106 CPM Features ........................................................................ 325
Table 107 SFM Features ......................................................................... 328
Table 108 C-XMA Features ..................................................................... 333
Table 109 XMA Features ......................................................................... 334
Table 110 APEQ Slots ............................................................................. 341
Table 111 Front Cable Guides ................................................................ 354
17 Pin Assignments.......................................................... 355

Table 112 OES1 and OES2 Ports— RJ-48C Female ............................ 356
Table 113 BITS Port — RJ-48C Female ................................................. 357
Table 114 Data Terminal — DTE Mode — RS-232 Port ......................... 358
Table 115 Data Terminal — DCE Mode — RS-232 Port ........................ 358
Table 116 Alarm Terminal Connectors .................................................... 359
Table 117 10/100Mbs. Management Ethernet Port — RJ-45 Female .... 360
Table 118 1000Mbs. Management Ethernet Port — RJ-45 Female ....... 361

Table 119 The 7950 XRS-40 Rear Brackets ............................................ 373

Installation Guide
List of Figures
Figure 1 ESD Awareness Label............................................................... 28
Figure 2 WEEE Symbol for post-August 13, 2005 Product ..................... 38
Figure 3 Altitude Limit Symbol ................................................................. 42
3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

Figure 4 7950 System Architecture ......................................................... 49
Figure 5 7950 XRS-20e Chassis Front View ........................................... 52
Figure 6 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Front View ............................................. 54
Figure 7 AC/HVDC 7950 XRS-20e Rear View with Standalone SFMs ... 55
Figure 8 Universal 7950 XRS-20e Rear View with Multi-chassis SFMs.. 56
Figure 9 7950 XRS-40 Rear View with SFM Cross-Connect Cabling ..... 58
Figure 10 APEQ-DC-4275 Features.......................................................... 60
Figure 11 APEQ-HVDC-3000 Features..................................................... 62
Figure 12 APEQ-AC-3000 Features .......................................................... 63
Figure 13 APEQ-AC-4400 Features .......................................................... 64
Figure 14 APEQ-HVDC-4400 Features..................................................... 65
Figure 15 Dual DC Input Power Redundancy Scheme ............................. 67
Figure 16 Quad DC Input Power Redundancy Scheme ............................ 67
Figure 17 Power Connection Panel ........................................................... 69
Figure 18 PIM ............................................................................................ 70
Figure 19 Dual PCM .................................................................................. 71
Figure 20 Quad PCM................................................................................. 72
Figure 21 Main System Air Flow................................................................ 74
Figure 22 Impeller Fan Trays..................................................................... 75
Figure 23 PCM Fans.................................................................................. 76
Figure 24 PCM Air Flow............................................................................. 77
Figure 25 CCM Air Filter ............................................................................ 78
Figure 26 XCM Air Filter and Frame Assembly ......................................... 79
Figure 27 Main System Rear Air Filter Drawer .......................................... 79
Figure 28 APEQ Front Access Panel and Air Filter ................................... 80
Figure 29 Impedance Panels..................................................................... 81
Figure 30 Blocked Symbol......................................................................... 81
Figure 31 CCM Features ........................................................................... 83
Figure 32 CPM........................................................................................... 87
Figure 33 Standalone SFM-X20S-B .......................................................... 89
Figure 34 Standalone SFM2-X20S............................................................ 90
Figure 35 Multi-chassis Capable SFM....................................................... 91
Figure 36 XCM........................................................................................... 93
Figure 37 2-port 100 GE CFP C-XMA ....................................................... 95
Figure 38 20-port 10 GE SFP+ C-XMA ..................................................... 96
Figure 39 6-port 40 GE QSFP+ C-XMA .................................................... 97
Figure 40 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP C-XMA................................................... 98
Figure 41 2-port 100 GE DWDM XMA..................................................... 100
Figure 42 4-port 100 GE CXP XMA......................................................... 101

Installation Guide
Figure 43 40-port 10 GE SFP+ XMA ....................................................... 102

Figure 44 4-port 100 GE CFP2 XMA ....................................................... 103
Figure 45 6-port 400 GE CFP8 XMA ....................................................... 104
Figure 46 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO XMA.............................................. 105
Figure 47 Universal 24-port QSFP28 XMA.............................................. 106
Figure 48 Universal 12-port QSFP-DD XMA ........................................... 108
4 Intelligent Power Management ................................... 111

Figure 49 Sample Scenario ..................................................................... 118

Figure 50 Master and Extension Chassis Separation Guidelines............ 143
Figure 51 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions ....................... 147
Figure 52 7950 XRS-20e AC Chassis Dimensions ................................. 149
Figure 53 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels .... 151
Figure 54 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions ......................... 153
Figure 55 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels ...... 155

Figure 56 Shipping Crate Dimensions ..................................................... 173
Figure 57 Shipping Crate Latch ............................................................... 174
Figure 58 Lifting Ramp ............................................................................ 175
Figure 59 Securing Ramp........................................................................ 175
Figure 60 Ramp in Open Position............................................................ 176
Figure 61 Removing Keeper.................................................................... 177
Figure 62 Removing Chassis................................................................... 177
Figure 63 Unloaded Chassis ................................................................... 178
Figure 64 Positioning Chassis to Rack .................................................... 182
Figure 65 Pushing Chassis into Rack...................................................... 183
Figure 66 Securing Chassis in Rack........................................................ 184
Figure 67 Fan Bay Door Ground Strap.................................................... 186
Figure 68 Prepare the Ground Wire ........................................................ 187
Figure 69 Connect the Grounding Lug on the Chassis............................ 188
Figure 70 Attaching PIM Slot ID Brackets ............................................... 189
Figure 71 Installing PCM Fans ................................................................ 190

Figure 72 APEQ Slot Numbers................................................................ 196
Figure 73 Installing 4275W APEQ ........................................................... 197
Figure 74 Preparing the DC Cable .......................................................... 201
Figure 75 Installing an HVDC APEQ ....................................................... 206
Figure 76 T-Latch HVDC Power Cord Connector.................................... 208
Figure 77 HVDC APEQ Cable Routing ................................................... 209
Figure 78 Installing an AC APEQ ............................................................ 211
Figure 79 C19 AC Power Cord Connector .............................................. 214
Figure 80 T-Latch AC Power Cord Connector......................................... 214
Figure 81 AC APEQ Cable Routing ........................................................ 215

Installation Guide

Figure 82 ESD Chassis Grounding Jack ................................................. 217
Figure 83 Inserting the CPM into the Chassis ......................................... 219
Figure 84 Inserting the SFM into the Chassis.......................................... 221

Figure 85 2-complex 1.6T 4-port CFP8 (3HE13812xA)........................... 234
Figure 86 2-complex 2.4T 6-port CFP8 (3HE12324xA)........................... 234
Figure 87 1-complex 1.2T 6-port CFP2-DCO (3HE14665xA) ................. 236
Figure 88 2-complex 1.2T 12-port QSFP28 (3HE13810xA) .................... 237
Figure 91 2-complex 1.6T 8-port QSFP-DD (3HE14662xA).................... 240
Figure 92 2-complex 2.4T 12-port QSFP-DD (3HE14663/4xA)............... 241
Figure 94 Removing Impedance Panels.................................................. 246
Figure 95 Inserting the XCM into the Chassis ......................................... 247
Figure 96 Inserting C-XMAs into the Chassis.......................................... 249
Figure 97 Inserting XMAs into the Chassis.............................................. 251
11 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling ..................... 253

Figure 98 7950 XRS-40 Rear Cable Guide Kit ........................................ 254
Figure 99 Mounting 7950 XRS-40 Rear Cable Guides............................ 255
Figure 100 Tie-down Bracket..................................................................... 256
Figure 101 SFM Interconnect Cable.......................................................... 258
Figure 102 7950 XRS-40 SFM Slot Numbering Scheme .......................... 259
Figure 103 SFM Interconnections.............................................................. 260
Figure 104 SFM Interconnect Cable Routing ............................................ 261
Figure 105 CPM Interconnections ............................................................. 267
Figure 106 Deployment with Co-located BITS Equipment ........................ 272
Figure 107 Deployment Where no BITS Equipment is Available .............. 273
13 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up ................................. 279

Figure 108 Files on the Compact Flash..................................................... 282
15 LEDs.............................................................................. 293
Figure 109 CCM LEDs............................................................................... 294
Figure 110 CPM LEDs............................................................................... 299
Figure 111 Standalone SFM LEDs ............................................................ 301
Figure 112 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LEDs ........................................... 302
Figure 113 XCM LED................................................................................. 303
Figure 114 Example: Port Indicators for 10x10 GE Breakout.................... 307
Figure 115 APEQ-DC-4275 ....................................................................... 310
Figure 116 APEQ-DC-2200/2800 LEDs .................................................... 310
Figure 117 APEQ-HVDC-3000 LED .......................................................... 310
Figure 118 APEQ-AC-3000 LED ............................................................... 311
Figure 119 APEQ-AC-4400 LEDs ............................................................. 311
Figure 120 APEQ-HVDC-4400 LEDs ........................................................ 311

Installation Guide
Figure 121 Dual PCM LEDs ...................................................................... 312

Figure 122 Quad PCM LEDs ..................................................................... 313
Figure 123 Fan Tray Status LED ............................................................... 314
Figure 124 PCM Fan LED ......................................................................... 315

Figure 126 Removing the Air Filter Drawer ............................................... 318
Figure 127 Removing the XCM Air Filter .................................................. 319
Figure 128 Removing the Air Filter Drawer ............................................... 320
Figure 129 Removing the Filter Element ................................................... 321
Figure 130 Correctly Positioning the Filter in the Upgrade Drawer .......... 322
Figure 131 APEQ Access Panel and Filter................................................ 323
Figure 132 Removing and Replacing a CPM ............................................ 325
Figure 133 Removing and Replacing an SFM........................................... 328
Figure 134 Removing and Replacing C-XMA............................................ 333
Figure 135 Removing and Replacing XMA................................................ 334
Figure 136 Replacing an XCM................................................................... 339
Figure 137 APEQ Slots.............................................................................. 341
Figure 138 Front Cable Guides ................................................................. 353
17 Pin Assignments.......................................................... 355

Figure 139 CCM Port Types ...................................................................... 355
Figure 140 Alarm Ports.............................................................................. 359

Figure 141 Attaching Catches to Front Chassis Posts .............................. 364
Figure 142 Removing Protective Film from Front Window ........................ 365
Figure 143 Mounting Front Panel .............................................................. 366
Figure 144 Securing Front Panel .............................................................. 367
Figure 145 Attaching Catches to Rear 7950 XRS-20e Chassis Posts ...... 369
Figure 146 Removing Protective Film from Rear Window......................... 370
Figure 147 Mounting Rear Panel to 7950 XRS-20e Chassis .................... 371
Figure 148 Securing Rear Panel to 7950 XRS-20e Chassis ..................... 372
Figure 149 Attaching Catches to Rear 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Posts ........ 374
Figure 150 Removing Protective Film from Rear Windows ....................... 375
Figure 151 Mounting Rear Panels to 7950 XRS-40 Chassis..................... 376
Figure 152 Securing Rear Panels to 7950 XRS-40 Chassis ..................... 377

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Preface
Installation Guide
1 Preface
This guide provides site preparation information and unpacking, installation, and rack
mounting procedures for the Nokia 7950 XRS-20e® and 7950 XRS-40® routers. This
document also provides information about how to safely connect power and ground,
and install system components, such as:
• Advanced Power EQualization and control (APEQ) modules

• DC power connection panel (PCP)
• Power Input Modules (PIMs)
• Power Connection Modules (PCMs)
• Control Processor Modules (CPMs)
• Switch Fabric Modules (SFMs)
• XMA Control Modules (XCMs)
• XRS Media Adapters (XMAs)
• Compact XRS Media Adapters (C-XMA)
• Impeller fan trays
• PCM fans
This document also includes instructions about how to remove and replace field-
replaceable units (FRUs).
After you have completed the hardware installation process, refer to Documentation
Suite Overview (3HE10160AA). Here you will find listings of documents that contain
information about the boot process, software configuration, and Command Line
Interface (CLI) to configure system and network parameters.
Note: The 7950 Extensible Routing System (XRS) routers have the same operating system
software used on other Nokia products, such as the 7450 Ethernet Service Switches (ESS)
and 7750 Service Routers (SR).

Preface 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
1.1 Warnings and Notes

Observe the warnings and notes to avoid injury or router damage during installation
and maintenance. Follow the safety procedures and guidelines when working with
and near electrical equipment. Warning statements and notes are provided in each
chapter.
1.2 Audience
This guide is intended for network installers and system administrators who are
responsible for installing, configuring, or maintaining networks. This guide assumes
you are familiar with electronic and networking technologies.
1.3 Symbols and Labels

The following symbols and labels are contained in this guide:
Table 1 Information Symbols
Symbol Meaning Description
Danger This symbol warns that incorrect handling and installation could
result in bodily injury or death. An electric shock hazard could exist.
Before you begin work on this equipment, be aware of hazards involving
electrical circuitry, be familiar with networking environments, and
implement accident prevention procedures.
Warning This symbol warns that incorrect handling and installation could result in
equipment damage or loss of data.
Caution This symbol warns that incorrect handling may reduce your component or
system performance.
Note This symbol provides additional operational information.

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Preface
Installation Guide
Table 1 Information Symbols (Continued)
Class 1 laser products are identified in the adapter card installation

guides. Only approved Class 1 replaceable laser transceivers should be
used with this product.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT EXPOSE USERS OF TELESCOPIC OPTICS
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
RAYONNEMENT LASER
NE PAS EXPOSER LES UTILISATEURS DE DISPOSITIF
OPTIQUE TÉLESCOPIQUE
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1M
1.4 Technical Support

If you purchased a service agreement for your router and related products from a
distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller for assistance. If you purchased an Nokia service agreement, contact
technical assistance at:
Customer Documentation Technical Support

Preface 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Regulatory and Customer Requirements
Installation Guide
2 Regulatory and Customer Requirements

• Regulatory Compliance Standards and Certifications, section 2.1
• List of Terms, section 2.2
• General Requirements, section 2.3
• Canada Regulations, section 2.6
• United States Regulations, section 2.7
• European Union Regulations, section 2.8
• Australia/New Zealand Regulations, section 2.9
• China Regulations, section 2.10
• South Korea Regulations, section 2.11
• Japan Regulations, section 2.12
Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards and

Certifications
Table 2 Safety Standards and Compliance Agency Certifications
Type Publication
Safety UL/CSA/IEC/EN 60950-1

AS/NZS 60950.1
IEC/EN 60825-1 (Applicable to optical transceivers)
IEC/EN 60825-2 (Applicable to optical transceivers)
FDA CDRH 21-CFR 1040 (Applicable to optical transceivers)

Regulatory and Customer Requirements 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Table 2 Safety Standards and Compliance Agency Certifications (Continued)
Type Publication
EMC Emission EN55032,Class A

ETSI EN 300 386, Class A
FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A1
ICES-003, Class A1
VCCI, Class A
CISPR 32, Class A
AS/NZS CISPR32, Class A
KN32, Class A
EN 61000-6-4, Class A
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EMC Immunity EN 55024
CISPR 24
ETSI EN 300 386
KN35
BT GS7
EN 61000-6-2 Immunity for industrial environments
ETSI EN 300 132-2 Power Supply Interface
ETSI EN 300 132-3 AC and DC Power Supply Interface
NEBS Level 3/ GR-1089-CORE
RBOC GR-63-CORE
ATIS-0600015
ATT-TP-76200
VZ-TPR-9205
VZ-TPR-9305

Installation Guide
Table 2 Safety Standards and Compliance Agency Certifications (Continued)
Type Publication
Environmental ETSI EN 300 019-2-1; Storage Tests, Class 1.2

ETSI EN 300 019-2-2; Transportation Tests, Class 2.3
ETSI EN 300 019-2-3; Operational Tests, Class 3.2
ETSI EN 300 019-2-4, Earthquake
RoHS2
WEEE
China RoHS
1.Requires EMI/Fiber Protection panels, see section 18
Note: See reports for detailed compliance status.
2.2 List of Terms

Table 3 lists the mandatory regulations terms used in this guide.
Table 3 List of Terms
Term Expansion
ACMA Australian Communications and Media Authority

ACTA Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AS/NZ Australian/New Zealand standard
CBN Common Bonding Network
CE Conformité Européene
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CSA International Canadian Standards Association International
DC-C Common DC Return
DC-I Isolated DC Return

Installation Guide
Table 3 List of Terms (Continued)
Term Expansion
EEC European Economic Community

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EN European Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FCC Federal Communications Commission
IBN Isolated Bonding Network
ICES Interference Causing Equipment Standard
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers (UK)
LVD Low Voltage Directive
NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
OSHA (USA) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (USA)
RoHS Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances
R&TTE Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
TNV1 Telecommunications Network Voltage, class 1
UL Underwriters Laboratories
WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment

Installation Guide
2.3 General Requirements

The sections that follow outline the mandatory regulations that govern the installation
and operation of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis. The information in
this section also describes instructions and information related to overall
conformance with the mandatory regulations. You must adhere to these instructions
so that your system meets regulatory and customer requirements.
2.3.1 Dangers and Warnings

You must comply with the general safety precautions and product requirements
described below during site preparation and equipment installation. Specific
precautions and requirements are contained in the individual chapters in this guide.
Danger:
• All 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis use a fiber-optic communications method
and are Class 1 and Class 1M laser products. Additionally, there are no user-
serviceable parts in the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis. Installation and
servicing of the system must be done only by trained service personnel familiar with
potential electrical, mechanical, and laser radiation hazards.
• Before working on equipment that is connected to power, remove jewelry, such as rings,
necklaces, and watches. When metal objects are in contact with power and ground,
serious burns can occur or the objects can be welded to the terminals.
• CLASS 1 AND 1M LASER PRODUCT
• APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1 ET CLASSE 1M
• WARNING HIGH TOUCH CURRENT EARTH CONNECTION ESSENTIAL BEFORE
CONNECTING SUPPLY
• COURANT DE FUITE ÉLEVÉ. RACCORDEMENT À LA TERRE INDISPENSABLE
AVANT LE RACCORDEMENT AU RÉSEAU
• Always keep your fingers away from rotating fan blades. Do not put your fingers or any
tool in the fan tray if the fans are still spinning.
• The fans move at very high speed and will cause injury if they are not allowed to spin
down and stop before servicing. When servicing, pull the fan tray about 1 in. (2.5 cm)
out of the slot to disconnect the tray from the backplane. Allow the fans to spin down
and fully stop before removing the fan tray from the chassis.
• Wait until the fans stop spinning (about 2 s) before completely removing the fan tray
from its slot.
• Hearing Protection Required.

Installation Guide
Warning:
• The compliance and long-term reliability of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40
products are wholly dependent on using the product within the environmental limits and
restrictions described in the Site Preparation chapter.
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if components are mishandled. When
working on a 7950 XRS-20e or 7950 XRS-40 system, always wear an ESD-preventive
wrist or ankle strap connected to a nearby ground point that is connected to a site
grounding point. Typical ground points include the grounding studs on the top and side
of the chassis, or a properly grounded rack or work bench. Refer to Antistatic Measures
for more information.
2.3.2 Antistatic Measures

Figure 1 shows the ESD awareness label used on Nokia products to alert personnel
to the presence of ESD-sensitive devices in the product. The necessary ESD
precautions must be taken whenever this symbol is present on the product.
Figure 1 ESD Awareness Label
17658
The risk of damage to an ESD-sensitive device is reduced considerably after

assembly in a circuit designed to protect sensitive components; however, the
following basic precautions should be taken to reduce ESD to harmless levels.
• Handle all units as if they contained ESD-sensitive devices unless they are known not to
contain ESD-sensitive parts.
• Wear an antistatic ESD strap on your wrist or heel prior to and while touching or handling
units containing ESD-sensitive devices.
• For surfaces with resistance to ground in excess of 100 MΩ, such as ordinary tile, either
cover them with properly grounded static dissipative runners or wax them with a static
dissipative wax.
• Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship units in antistatic bags or containers.
• Do not handle units and components unnecessarily. Use the plastic faceplate to handle
circuit boards.
• Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean units.
• Handle failed units with the same precautions as working units.

Installation Guide
2.3.2.1 Grounding
When a 7950 XRS-20e or 7950 XRS-40 chassis is properly installed in a grounded

equipment rack, the rack provides ESD grounding for the chassis. Before a chassis
is installed, connect the ESD wrist strap to a grounded rack or other ground point.
After the chassis is installed in a grounded rack or cabinet, connect the antistatic
wrist strap to the ESD strap ground point on one of the ground studs identified by the
wrist strap label.
2.3.3 Interconnection Points
2.3.3.1 SELV
• Management
• Console
• Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)
• SyncE/1588 (reserved for future use)
• Optical Extension Shelf (OES) (reserved for future use)
• Alarm interface
• DC battery input (when less than 60 VDC)
Only connect like circuits: SELV to SELV, TNV2 to TNV2, and Primary to Primary, as
defined in CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1, UL 60950-1, EN 60950-1, AS/NZS 60950-1, and
IEC60950-1.
2.3.3.2 TNV2
DC battery input (when 60 VDC, up to 80 VDC)
2.3.3.3 Primary
AC power input

Installation Guide
2.3.4 Laser Interface

The 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 systems use a fiber-optic communications
method and are FDA and IEC Class 1 and Class 1M laser products. Only trained
service personnel thoroughly familiar with laser radiation hazards should install or
remove the fiber-optic cables and cards in these systems.
2.3.5 Protective Safety Ground (Earth)

The cable used for safety ground should be at least the same gauge as the supply
conductors, green, or green and yellow, in color, and of sufficient length to connect
the building earth point to the chassis ground connection (see Making the Chassis
Ground Connection, section 7.5 for specific instructions for connecting the chassis
ground).
2.3.6 EMC Compliance

EMC compliance may require the use of ferrites, shielded cables, or other special
accessories. Where required, these special accessories must be installed as per the
instructions.
To maintain EMC compliance, cables that are shielded and grounded at both ends
must be used on the following interfaces and ports:
• electrical Ethernet interfaces

• Management (Ethernet) and Console ports
Note: All of the RJ-45 ports and the alarm interface port on all CCM module types require
the use of shielded cables.
2.3.7 Regulatory Symbols

The 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis use various regulatory symbols,
which may be used on product markings such as approvals labels. These symbols
are described in IEC 60417 and shown in Table 4.

Installation Guide
Table 4 Regulatory Symbols
Protective earth This symbol indicates that you must connect to earth ground
(ground) before you make any other connections to the equipment.
Protective bond This symbol indicates that you must provide a protective bond
connection on the equipment; that is, any accessible metal
parts that could become energized must be properly bonded
to the earthed chassis.
Hot surface This symbol indicates that the equipment surface is hot to the
touch when it is powered on.
Direct current This symbol indicates that the equipment is suitable for direct
current only.
Alternating This symbol indicates that the equipment is suitable for
current alternating current only.
Caution This symbol indicates that caution should be taken when

handling the equipment.
Read operator’s This symbol indicates that the operator’s manual or card
manual instructions should be read before continuing with an
operation.
Disconnect To avoid shock hazard, disconnect all power sources before
power sources servicing.
Potential for To avoid shock hazard, read instruction manuals before

shock hazard servicing.
Protective earth The protective earth connection is essential for safe

connection operation. Follow instructions and connect the protective
essential earth conductor before powering equipment.

Installation Guide
2.4 Safety Approvals

This product is approved by an NRTL and also the IECEE CB Scheme. It is compliant
to IEC 60950-1 with all country deviations.
2.5 Safety Approval for External DC Sources

The DC source, from which this equipment derives power, must be safety approved
(as per local requirements) and meet the requirements of a SELV source as defined
in IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60950-1. For 60V DC sources, the source output is considered
TNV-2 as per IEC/UL/CSA/EN 60950-1.
The external DC source must have double or reinforced levels of insulation or basic
insulation plus one pole reliably earthed, isolating the DC output from the AC mains.
(AC mains are sources up to and including 300Vrms, including 230/400 V and 277/
480 V sources).

Installation Guide
2.6 Canada Regulations

This section describes the mandatory regulations that govern the installation and
operation of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis in Canada.
2.6.1 Industry Canada Regulations
ICES-003: Interference-Causing Equipment Standard - Information Technology

Equipment (ITE) - Limits and methods of measurement
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user’s
authority, granted by Nokia’s certification by Industry Canada, to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.
2.6.2 EMC Compliance

EMC compliance may require the use of ferrites, shielded cables or other special
accessories. Where required, these special accessories must be installed as per the
instructions.
2.6.3 Safety Approval for DC Systems

The DC source for the system must meet the requirements of a SELV source to
comply with CSA standard C22.2 No. 60950-1. Use the system with a SELV
secondary source that is electrically isolated from the AC source and that is reliably
grounded.
The 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis are safety certified according to CSA
standard C22.2 No. 60950-1 by CSA.

Installation Guide
2.7 United States Regulations

operation of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis in the United States.
2.7.1 Federal Communications Commission
FCC Part 15
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user’s
authority, granted by Nokia’s certification by the FCC, to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at the user’s expense.
2.7.2 NRTL
This equipment is certified by the NRTL as meeting the requirements of UL 60950-1,
Safety of Information Technology Equipment.

Installation Guide
2.7.3 NRTL Approval for External DC Supplies

When the system is equipped with an AC rectifier, the rectifier must have
NRTL-accredited approval. In addition, the DC outputs must meet UL 60950-1 SELV
requirements.

The DC source for the system must meet the requirements of a SELV source in
accordance with UL 60950-1. You must use the system with a SELV secondary
source that is electrically isolated from the AC source and that is reliably grounded.
2.7.5 Food and Drug Administration

This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 regulations, which govern
the safe use of lasers. Only qualified service personnel, thoroughly familiar with laser
radiation hazards, should install or remove the fiber-optic cables used in this system.
You can find information about the safe use of lasers in ANSI Z 136.1: Safe Use of
Lasers and ANSI Z 136.2: Safe Use of Lasers in Optical Fiber Communications
Systems. You can obtain these documents and other instructional material from:
Laser Institute of America

13501 Ingenuity Drive, Suite 128
Orlando, FL 32826
http://www.laserinstitute.org

Installation Guide
2.8 European Union Regulations

operation of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis in the European Union.
2.8.1 Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Nokia declares that the equipment documented in this publication is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 2014/35/EU, Directive 2014/30/EU, and Directive 2011/65/EU.
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure

is kept at the Nokia location that is responsible for this product. For more information,
please contact your local Nokia Customer Service Organization.
2.8.2 EU Compliance Statement

This product has been CE marked in accordance with the requirements of the Radio
and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (R&TTE), Directive 2014/35/
EU, Low Voltage (LVD) Directive, 2014/30/EU, the Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) and 2011/65/EU, the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS 2)
Directive.
2.8.3 EMC/EMI Compliance

The equipment complies with the following EMC and EMI specifications: EN 300 386
Class A.
2.8.4 General
This equipment must be permanently grounded.

Installation Guide
2.8.5 Laser Interface

The system uses laser devices that are rated in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 as
Class 1 devices.

The DC source for the system must meet the requirements of a SELV source as
defined in EN 60950-1. For 60 VDC station battery systems, the source is considered
TNV2 as per IEC/EN 60950-1 and must have reinforced insulation from the AC
mains.
The equipment complies with the following Product Safety specification:

EN 60950-1.
2.8.7 Protective Earth

Protective earth is referred to as chassis ground in this document. A green or green
and yellow earth wire must be connected from the site equivalent of the mains earth
connection to all shelves in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations (16th edition).
This connection is made via the chassis ground connection (see Making the Chassis
Ground Connection, section 7.5 for specific instructions for connecting the protective
earth). The protective earth is also carried by the mains plug and socket (for AC
systems only).
2.8.8 Approval for External AC Rectifiers

When the system is equipped with an external AC rectifier, the rectifier must meet
EN 60950-1 SELV DC output requirements. Make sure that the rectifier is rated and
adjusted for the appropriate AC input voltage and frequency for the country where it
is installed. Set the output of the rectifier according to the installation and operating
instructions of the manufacturer, to provide output levels that coincide with the
nominal DC input ratings of the system.

Installation Guide
2.8.9 Eco-Environmental
Packaging Collection and Recovery Requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be

established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer,
or other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or
recycling targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be
established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the appropriate environmental
health and safety organization.
Recycling / Take-back / Disposal of Product
Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown in Figure 2, when put
on the market within the European Union, shall be collected and treated at the end
of their useful life in compliance with applicable European Union and local legislation.
They shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials
that may be contained in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the
environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of
inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the European Union, the WEEE symbol (a wheeled trash bin that has been crossed
out and is positioned above a solid bar) indicates that the product was put on the market
after 13 August 2005. This product is compliant with the WEEE marking requirements of
DIRECTIVE 2012/19/EU Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE).
Figure 2 WEEE Symbol for post-August 13, 2005 Product
WEEE Symbol 21828

Installation Guide
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Nokia will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of Nokia
products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products displaced by
Nokia equipment offers. For information regarding take-back of equipment by Nokia,
or for more information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product,
please contact your Nokia Account Manager or Nokia Takeback Support at
http://company.nokia.com/en/our-activities/protecting-the-environment.
2.8.10 Material Content Compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2011/65/EU, “Restriction of the use of certain
Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment” (RoHS 2), restricts
the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, and certain flame
retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This Directive applies to electrical
and electronic products placed on the EU market after 2 January 2013, with various
exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure
equipment. Nokia products shipped to the EU after 2 January 2013 comply with the
EU RoHS 2 Directive. Nokia ensures that equipment is assessed in accordance with
the Harmonised Standard EN 50581:2012 (CENELEC) on “Technical documentation
for the assessment of electrical and electronic products with respect to the restriction
of hazardous substances”.

Installation Guide
2.9 Australia/New Zealand Regulations

operation of the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis in Australia and New
Zealand.
2.9.1 ACMA Regulations

The 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis comply with the ACMA requirements,
and the product is marked with the 'A Tick' under the Supplier Code N594 or with the
new RCM logo under the Supplier Code E762.
EMC
This Class A digital apparatus complies with AS/NZS CISPR22 and AS/NZS
CISPR32.
Safety
All products supplied in Australia are to be safe and are to comply with an applicable
Australian Standard electrical safety standard.
The 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis comply with the AS/NZS
Telecommunications requirements.

Installation Guide
2.10 China Regulations

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis when deployed in China.
2.10.1 Safety
The equipment complies with the Product Safety specification of IEC
60950-1.Eco-Environmental.
2.10.2 Packaging Collection and Recovery Requirements

Jurisdictions in China may require that systems be established for the return and/or
collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user, or from the
waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the return
and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the appropriate environmental
health and safety organization.
2.10.3 Material Content Compliance

The People’s Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a
regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous
substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and
Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation
requirements. Nokia products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are
intended for sale to customers in the China market, comply with these requirements.
In accordance with the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard

“Marking for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Products” (SJ/
T11364-2006), customers may access the Nokia Hazardous Substances Table, in
Chinese, from the following location:
http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/
ChinaRoHS.pdf

Installation Guide
2.10.4 Altitude Limit

Nokia products may use the symbol shown in Figure 3 on the approvals label to
indicate that the product is only to be used at altitudes equal to or less than 2000 m
(6562 ft) above sea level.
Figure 3 Altitude Limit Symbol
2000m
23467
“Only used at altitudes no higher than 2000 m above sea level”
Note: If product is to be used at an altitude above 2000 m, please consult Nokia prior to
installation.

Installation Guide
2.11 South Korea Regulations

The following EMC statement applies to the 7950 XRS-20e and 7750 SR-7 chassis
when deployed in South Korea.
EMC
Class A Equipment (Broadcasting and Communication Equipment for Office Work)
The seller and user will be notified that this equipment is suitable for electromagnetic
equipment for office work (Class A) and it can be used outside the home.
South Korea's “Electrical Communication Basic Law” requires EMC testing and
certification. Certified equipment will be labeled with the KC mark and certification
number shown below:
Certification number for the 7950 XRS-20e chassis:
MSIP-REM-ALU-7950XRS-20E

Installation Guide
2.12 Japan Regulations

The statements that follow are the product conformance statements that apply to the
7950 XRS-20e chassis when deployed in Japan.
2.12.1 Safety
The equipment complies with the Product Safety specifications of IEC 60950-1 and/
or IEC 62368-1.
Note:
• AC PSUs and AC cords sold by Nokia with a 3HExxxxxxx part number are dedicated
for use with Nokia IP routers only.
• Based on the requirements from METI (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry), these
AC PSUs and AC cords do not require PSE certification if used solely with Nokia IP
routers.
2.12.2 EMC
This equipment is a VCCI Class A compliant product and is marked with the VCCI
logo shown below.
Class A Equipment

Installation Guide
This equipment is a Class A device. Operation of this equipment in a residential

environment could cause radio interference. In such a case, the user may be
required to take corrective actions. VCCI-A

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis System Overview
Installation Guide
3 System Overview
• System Description, section 3.1
• Chassis Common Components, section 3.2
• Control and Management, section 3.3
• Switching, section 3.4
• Forwarding, section 3.5
3.1 System Description

The 7950 Extensible Routing System platforms are ultra-high capacity, efficient, and
extensible systems designed for a common 19-inch rack footprint. The 7950 XRS
family consists of 7950 XRS-20, 7950 XRS-20e, and 7950 XRS-40 platforms. All
7950 XRS-Series platforms are based on the same innovative and flexible FP family
of network processors providing the highest performance even when configured to
provide complex services. They share the same line-cards and power modules.
Refer to 7950 XRS-20 and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide for detail
information about how to install the 7950 XRS-20. This document provides the
installation and bring up instructions for 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 systems.
Note: The 7950 XRS-40 consists of two 7950 XRS-20e or 7950 XRS-20 systems
connected in a back-to-back configuration.
There are two 7950 XRS-20e chassis variant designations based on power options:
• Universal 7950 XRS-20e – includes the DC power connection panel (PCP),

which in turn supports Power Input Modules (PIMs), and Power Connection
Modules (PCMs) connection modules. The Universal chassis also supports
all available APEQs.
• AC/ High Voltage DC (HVDC) 7950 XRS-20e – does not include the PCP
and supports only terminated APEQ-HVDC-3000, APEQ-AC-3000,
APEQ-AC-4400 modules and APEQ-HVDC-4400.
The 7950 XRS-20e chassis has 20 slots; each initially capable of supporting up to
400 Gb/s of aggregate interface capacity. It utilizes a passive mid-plane design and
single-stage crossbar switch fabric architecture as the basis for a highly resilient
system.

System Overview 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
The 7950 XRS-20e system is designed to be multi-chassis capable. The switch

fabric modules have optical extension modules that can be connected using SFM
interconnect cables to another 7950 XRS-20e. In addition, the 7950 XRS-20e is
available in a standalone configuration (without SFM optical extension modules) for
applications where the capacity of a single system is sufficient; see section 3.1.3.
A standalone 7950 XRS-20e system can be upgraded to a multi-chassis capable
version by replacing the SFM modules with modules that have optical extensions.
The 7950 XRS-40 system supports 40 interface slots, each initially supporting 400
Gb/s of aggregate interface capacity. The 7950 XRS-40 system architecture utilizes
the multi-chassis capability of the 7950 XRS-20e with two 7950 XRS-20e or
7950 XRS-20 systems connected in a back-to-back configuration.
One 7950 XRS-20e is designated as the master chassis and the other one as the
extension chassis. A single 7950 XRS-40 system view is presented through the
master chassis.
The systems run on the proven, resilient, and feature-rich SR-OS operating system,
which supports a full range of core networking requirements including internet
routing, MPLS switching, IP peering, data center interconnection, and infrastructure
services. All of this is delivered on platforms that combine industry leading capacity,
versatility, and efficiency without compromise.
Note: Since 7950 XRS-40 consists of two 7950 XRS-20e or 7950 XRS-20 systems
connected in a back-to-back configuration, chassis-level information including the
installation of the chassis and line cards is common for both system configurations.
Installation of the cables to interconnect two 7950 XRS-20e or 7950 XRS-20 systems to
form a 7950 XRS-40 configuration, upgrade, and bring-up of 7950 XRS-40 are covered
separately.

Installation Guide
3.1.1 System Architecture

Figure 4 shows a functional block diagram of the 7950 XRS system architecture. It is
a fully distributed, modular, and resilient design that integrates the three functional
areas of the 7950 routing system:
• Switching Plane, consisting of SFMs

• Forwarding Plane, consisting of XCMs and XMAs
• Control Plane, consisting of CPMs
Figure 4 7950 System Architecture
CPM CPM
XCM CPU CPU XCM
XMA XMA
XMA XMA
XCM CPU CPU XCM

SFM
XMA XMA
XMA XMA
OSSG745
3.1.1.1 Switching Plane
The switching plane consists of one or more SFMs. Each SFM is a scalable, single-
stage crossbar that uses silicon technology to implement a fabric that offers non-
blocking any-to-any connectivity, resiliency, and the ability to scale by multiplying the
number of switching elements in the system. Each forwarding and control entity in
the system sits directly on the switch fabric, allowing for massive bandwidth to line
cards as well as to control and processing cards.

Installation Guide
When two 7950 XRS-20e systems are combined to create a single 7950 XRS-40
system, traffic from any port on one of the 7950 XRS-20e system is seamlessly
switched to any other port on the same 7950 XRS-20e, or the other 7950 XRS-20e
system.
3.1.1.2 Forwarding Plane
The forwarding plane consists of XCMs and XMAs that perform many critical
functions of the forwarding plane, including:
• Packet lookups and forwarding

• Packet classification
• Packet processing
• Services
• QoS functions
• Layer 2 functions
• All media/port and optical functions
The XMAs available for the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 include:
• 20-port SFP+ C-XMA

• 2-port CFP C-XMA
• 6-port QSFP+ C-XMA
• 4-port CXP XMA
• 4-port CFP2 XMA
• 40-Port SFP+ XMA
• 72-port C-SFP/36-port 1 GE SFP C-XMA
• 2-port INT DWDM XMA
• 24-port QSFP28 XMA
• 6-port CFP8 XMA
• 6-port CFP2-DCO
• 12-port QSFP-DD

Installation Guide
3.1.1.3 Control Plane
Control plane functions are distributed throughout the system so that no single entity
provides all functions, thus enabling scalable control plane performance. CPMs
(see section 3.3.2) provide all routing and chassis-level control functions for the
system. Distributed control functions are integrated with the forwarding plane by
means of the XCMs (see section 3.4.2). Chassis-level control interface functions are
located on the CCMs (see section 3.3.1).
For 7950 XRS-40, the CPMs on the master chassis provide the primary control plane
function for the combined system. The extension chassis CPM(s) work with the
master chassis CPM(s) by providing extension chassis specific information.
3.1.2 Front Chassis Layout

• 7950 XRS-20e Chassis Front View (Figure 5)
• 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Front View (Figure 6)

Installation Guide
Figure 5 7950 XRS-20e Chassis Front View
C C
D
E
F
CAUTION CAUTION
LASER RADIATION LASER RADIATION
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
Do not view directly with Do not view directly with
optical instrument optical instrument
H G
K J
L M
O O
P
Q
hw0037

Installation Guide
Table 5 Chassis Front View Features
Key Description
A Front cover (CCM cable guide under cover)

B CCM ports
C CCM LCD touch panel (reserved for future use)
D CCM air filter
E Top cable guide
F Front chassis slot numbers
G C-XMA installed in upper slot
H XCM; can accommodate up to two C-XMAs with adapters, XMAs
without adapters, or, a combination of both.
I XMA installed in upper slot
J Front center air filter over card cage cool-air intake
K Full mechanical slots in front card cage
L Front rack mounting points
M Bottom row card slots
N Impedance panels: Required in all empty card slots to prevent excess
dust accumulation, to help control airflow and electromagnetic
interference, and for safety reasons
O ESD jacks: Located on each of the front rack mounting fixtures.
P Mechanical adapters (use with C-XMAs to properly fit in XCM slot)
Q Bottom cable guide
R Main cool-air intake
S APEQ access panel and air filter

Installation Guide
Figure 6 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Front View
Master Extension
hw0038
3.1.3 Rear Chassis Layout

The 7950 XRS-20e system is designed to be multi-chassis capable. The switch
fabric modules have optical extension modules that can be connected using SFM
interconnect cables to another 7950 XRS-20e; see Figure 7.
In addition, the 7950 XRS-20e is available in a standalone configuration—without

SFM optical extension modules—for applications where the capacity of a single
system is sufficient; see Figure 8.

Installation Guide
Figure 7 AC/HVDC 7950 XRS-20e Rear View with Standalone SFMs
C
D
E
F
hw0039

Installation Guide
Figure 8 Universal 7950 XRS-20e Rear View with Multi-chassis SFMs
A
B
C
D
E
F
hw0040b

Installation Guide
Table 6 Chassis Rear View Features
Key Description
A Chassis grounding pad: Total of two, located on left and right sides of
chassis; not shown
B Hot-air exhaust grill
C Location for mounting top rear cable guide required for 7950 XRS-40
to manage SFM cables, see section 11.1
D Slot labels
E CPM A: Install in slot labeled CPM A
F CPM B: Install in slot labeled CPM B
G SFMs: Install in slots labeled SFM 1 through SFM 8
H Location for mounting bottom rear cable guide required for
7950 XRS-40 to manage SFM cables, see section 11.1
I Air Filter Access area: main system air filter drawer
J DC power connection panel (PCP); used only for Universal chassis
K Hot air exhaust from APEQs

Installation Guide
Figure 9 7950 XRS-40 Rear View with SFM Cross-Connect Cabling
Master Extension
CPM CPM
A1 to C1 D1 to A2
A2 to D1 D2 to B2
SFM SFM
to 9 to 8
to 11 to 6
to 13 to 4
to 15 to 2
CPM CPM
1 3 5 7 10 12 14 16
B1 to C2 C1 to A1
A1
B2 to D2 C2 to B1 C1 D1
B1
A2 B2 C2 D2
2 4 6 8 SFM SFM 9 11 13 15
to 16 to 1
to 14 to 3
to 12 to 5
to 10 to 7
hw0041

Installation Guide
3.2 Chassis Common Components

• Advanced Power EQualization and Control Modules, section 3.2.1
• Power Connection Panel, section 3.2.2
• Cooling System, section 3.2.3
• Impedance Panels, section 3.2.4
• Cable Management System, section 3.2.5
3.2.1 Advanced Power EQualization and Control Modules

The Advanced Power EQualization and control (APEQ) modules is an intelligent
power supply that conditions power entering the system. It performs voltage
equalization, noise filtering, fusing, power monitoring, and other system-level power
related functions. The system can support a total of 12 APEQs. The minimum
number of APEQs to power the system is described in section 3.2.1.3. See also the
APEQ Electrical Specifications, section 5.4.4.
This modular design allows you to install the number of APEQs required to meet your
present needs. Later, as your system density grows, you can add APEQs to support
higher power requirements as needed.
The system uses a common power bus architecture to deliver power from the APEQ
slots in the front of the chassis to the fan and module slots. The power load required
by the chassis components is shared by all of the APEQs.
Table 7 lists the APEQ variants available for the 7950 XRS-20e.
Table 7 Available APEQ Variants
APEQ Part Number Description
APEQ-DC-2200/2800 3HE09422AA 2200 or 2800W (60/80A) DC APEQ

APEQ-DC-4275 3HE11099AA 4275W (60A) DC APEQ
APEQ-HVDC-3000 3HE10431AA 3000W (13A) High Voltage DC APEQ
APEQ-AC-3000 3HE09423AA 3000W (16A) AC APEQ
APEQ-AC-4400 3HE12492AA Dual-input 4400W (26A) AC APEQ
APEQ-HVDC-4400 3HE12508AA Dual-input 4400W (18A) HVDC APEQ

Installation Guide
3.2.1.1 APEQ-DC-4275
The Universal chassis supports all available APEQs.
Note: Figure 10 shows the APEQ-DC-4275. The APEQ-DC-2200/2800 modules look

similar but are distinguished physically by their labels and LEDs; see Table 8.
Figure 10 APEQ-DC-4275 Features
B hw0095
Table 8 APEQ-DC-4275 Feature Descriptions
Key Label/Part Description
A Ejector lever Seats and disengages the connectors to and from the midplane
B Captive screw Secures the APEQ in place
Note: The ejector lever and captive screw must be fully seated before the
APEQ can provide power to the system.
C Label and LED Label—60A: Status LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
Label—APEQ-DC-4275: Stat LED—APEQ operational status;
see section 15.6
Label—APEQ-DC-2200/2800
• Stat. LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
• 80A LED—indicates APEQ is configured for 80A operation

Installation Guide
When APEQ-DC-2200/2800 and APEQ-DC-4275 modules are used, the input power
cables are connected to the power input and connection module in the rear; see
section 8.3.2.3.
When APEQ-HVDC-3000, APEQ-AC-3000, APEQ-AC-4400 and APEQ-HVDC-

4400 modules are used, the input power cables are terminated at the front of each
module; see section 8.5 or section 8.7.
3.2.1.2 AC/HVDC Chassis APEQs
The AC/HVDC chassis supports the following power modules.
• APEQ-HVDC-3000, section 3.2.1.2.1

• APEQ-AC-3000, section 3.2.1.2.2
• APEQ-AC-4400, section 3.2.1.2.3
• APEQ-HVDC-4400, section 3.2.1.2.4

Installation Guide
3.2.1.2.1 APEQ-HVDC-3000
Figure 11 APEQ-HVDC-3000 Features
C
E
D B hw0096
Table 9 APEQ-HVDC-3000 Feature Descriptions
C Label and LED Label—APEQ-HVDC-3000
Stat. LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
D Receptacle HVDC input power receptacle. The APEQ is equipped with an Anderson
2006GK ultra short receptacle. The receptacle is touch-safe. The receptacle
requires an Anderson HVDC power cable with a T-Latch locking connector.
See section 8.5 for more information.
E Four-pin Reserved for future use
connector

Installation Guide
3.2.1.2.2 APEQ-AC-3000
Figure 12 APEQ-AC-3000 Features
D B hw0097
Table 10 APEQ-AC-3000 Feature Descriptions
C Label and LED Label—APEQ-AC-3000
Stat. LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
D Receptacle AC input power receptacle. The receptacle requires a cable with a C19
locking connector. See section 8.6 for more information about the power
cord requirements.
E Four-pin Reserved for future use
connector

Installation Guide
3.2.1.2.3 APEQ-AC-4400
The dual-input APEQ-AC-4400 provides power-feed redundancy to support fully

configured FP4 systems.
Figure 13 APEQ-AC-4400 Features
B hw0484
Table 11 APEQ-AC-4400 Feature Descriptions
C Label and Label—APEQ-AC-4400
LEDs • Stat. LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
• L1 and L2 LEDs—indicates status of respective input
D Receptacles AC input power receptacles. The receptacles requires cables with an
Anderson SAF-D-Grid 300 connectors. See section 8.6 for more information
about the power cord requirements.

Installation Guide
3.2.1.2.4 APEQ-HVDC-4400
The dual-input APEQ-HVDC-4400 provides power-feed redundancy to support fully

configured FP4 systems.
Figure 14 APEQ-HVDC-4400 Features
D
B
hw0648
Table 12 APEQ-HVDC-4400 Feature Descriptions
C Label and Label—APEQ-HVDC-4400
LEDs • Stat. LED—APEQ operational status; see section 15.6
• L1 and L2 LEDs—indicates status of respective input
D Receptacles DC input power receptacles. The receptacles requires cables with an
Anderson 2006GK ultra short receptacle. The receptacle is touch-safe. The
receptacle requires an Anderson HVDC power cable with a T-Latch locking
connector. See section 8.5 for more information about the power cord
requirements.

Installation Guide
3.2.1.3 Minimum Power Requirements
The minimum number of APEQs to power on the CCM, CPM, and Impeller fan trays
is 5. More system power capacity can be added with additional APEQs as needed.
3.2.1.4 Input Power Feed Redundancy
Input power feed redundancy protects against the loss of the customer-provided
input power to the APEQs. All powered APEQs are active and share the load
required by the chassis components. As power is delivered to the common bus bar,
the system dynamically adjusts the draw from each APEQ.
In the case of a failure of the A-side power feed, the APEQs connected to the B-side
power feed increase their output to the bus bar to power all of the components.
The Universal chassis DC APEQs use a redundancy model that is different from the
AC/HVDC chassis APEQs:
• DC APEQ Input Power Redundancy, section 3.2.1.4.1

• AC/HVDC Input Power Redundancy, section 3.2.1.4.2

Installation Guide
3.2.1.4.1 DC APEQ Input Power Redundancy
Each DC APEQ maps 1-to-1-to-1 to a PIM and a PCM. They each require a PCM
inserted in the PCP in order to connect power to the internal common-DC bus bar.
For the APEQ-DC-2200/2800 modules, input feed redundancy is achieved by

connecting only feeds A and B to the PIM as shown in Figure 15.
For the APEQ-DC-4275 module, input feed redundancy is achieved by connecting

all 4 sets of feeds (A, A2, B and B2) to the PIM. All 4 feeds are required to achieve
the full 4275W power output with 60A feeds as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 15 Dual DC Input Power Redundancy Scheme
2000/2200-2800W
APEQ
A B
PIM PIM
Dual PCM
A B
hw0305
Figure 16 Quad DC Input Power Redundancy Scheme
4275W
APEQ
A B
PIM
Quad PCM
A B2 A2 B
hw0304

Installation Guide
3.2.1.4.2 AC/HVDC Input Power Redundancy
The APEQ-HVDC-3000 and APEQ-AC-3000 support N + N input power redundancy.

For example, a full complement of twelve 3000W APEQs provides 6 + 6 power
redundancy and up to 18000W (6 x 3000W) of redundant power. In this
configuration, six APEQs are connected to power feed A, and six are connected to
power feed B.
The dual-input APEQ-AC-4400 and APEQ-HVDC-4400 modules provide full input

redundancy on all twelve APEQs. For example, if input power is lost on one side of
all twelve APEQs, the full complement of dual-input modules still provides power to
the system. If only one input feed is used, 6 + 6 power redundancy will provide power
to the system.
Note:
• AC/HVDC power modules are supported in both the Universal and the AC/HVDC
versions of the 7950 XRS-20e chassis.
• AC/HVDC power modules do not require power connections at the PCP because power
is cabled directly into the front of these APEQs; see section 8.

Installation Guide
3.2.2 Power Connection Panel

The Power Connection Panel (PCP) supports up to 12 Power Input Modules (PIMs)
and Power Connection Modules (PCMs), which are installed at the lower rear of the
chassis; see Figure 17. There are 12 PCP slots, each of which connects power to a
corresponding APEQ-DC-2200/2800 or APEQ-DC-4275 module.
Figure 17 Power Connection Panel
hw0170
Note:
• The power input and connection modules are used only when APEQ-DC-2200/2800 or
APEQ-DC-4275 modules are used.
• When APEQ-HVDC-3000, APEQ-AC-3000, APEQ-AC-4400 and APEQ-HVDC-4400
modules are used, the input power cables are terminated directly to the APEQ modules.
The PCP is not included with the AC/HVDC chassis.

Installation Guide
Each power input and connection module assembly consists of two major
components:
• Power Input Module (PIM)

• Power Connection Module (PCM)
3.2.2.1 PIMs
The PIM provides a landing area and studs to accommodate four -48 Vdc input
cables and four return cables; two for feed A and two for feed B.
Figure 18 PIM
RTN A -48V RTN B2 -48V
RTN A2 -48V RTN B -48V
hw0143

Installation Guide
3.2.2.2 PCMs
The PCMs provide the connection path for power to the system from the APEQ
associated to the corresponding PCP slot. A PCM maps one-to-one to the APEQ that
is inserted in the front of the chassis.
There are two PCM variants available:
• Dual PCM: Figure 19

• Quad PCM: Figure 20
Figure 19 Dual PCM
A
A
hw0144
Dual PCMs support the following APEQ variants:
Table 13 APEQ Variants that Support Dual PCMs
Name Description
APEQ-DC-2200/2800 2200 or 2800W (60/80A) DC APEQ

Installation Guide
Figure 20 Quad PCM
hw0279
The quad PCM support the 4275KW APEQ. These two assemblies must always be
used in conjunction with each other.
Note: If you install Quad PCMs, use must also install the PCM fan; see section 7.7.
3.2.2.3 Power Cabling
For DC power, use 4 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger for the -48V and RTN
or as required by the local regulatory code. The power connection module stud
center-to-center dimension is 15.88 mm [0.625 in].
3.2.2.4 Ground Cabling
The chassis must be grounded properly for all applications. Nokia supports both CBN
(common bonding network) and IBN (isolated bonding network) implementations for
the chassis. Choose the size of the grounding cables and lugs according to the
Agency/Country requirements for your location. The CSA safety certification requires
that the ground cables and lugs used should at the minimum match the size of the
cables and lugs used for power termination (4 AWG or larger, or as required by local
code).

Installation Guide
3.2.3 Cooling System

The cooling system consists of the following elements:
• cool-air intake ducts

• cool-air intake filters
• three impeller fan trays
• air guide
• PCM fans
• hot-air rear exhaust
The cooling system components work together to keep the internal components
within the acceptable temperature range. Loss of a fan tray or individual impeller fan
has no negative impact on system, routing, or forwarding functions.
There are multiple temperature sensors distributed throughout the system on

components and cards. The highest temperature from any sensor is reported as the
temperature for that component or card.
3.2.3.1 Air Flow
The main system fans pull cool air in through the front intakes and exhausts the hot
air to the rear of the chassis; see Figure 21.
The APEQ fans draw cool air in the bottom-front, through air filter and the APEQ
enclosure, and then exhausts the hot air out the bottom-rear of the chassis.
The PCM fans draw cool air into the top of the PCM channel and exhausts the hot
air to the rear of the chassis; see Figure 24.
Note: If you install the router in a cabinet or other enclosure, ensure that air intake and
exhaust flows are not restricted in any way; see Table 47.

Installation Guide
Figure 21 Main System Air Flow
hw0034

Installation Guide
3.2.3.2 Impeller Fan Trays
The main card array is cooled by cool air drawn through the chassis by three hot-
swappable impeller fan trays designated Fan Tray 1, 2, and 3; see Figure 22. For
7950 XRS-40 systems, impeller fan trays in the extension chassis are designated
Fan Tray 4, 5,and 6.
Figure 22 Impeller Fan Trays
A B C hw0137
Table 14 Cooling System (Rear View)
Key Description
A Fan tray 1
B Fan tray 2
C Fan tray 3
Each fan tray contains eight impeller fans. Each impeller fan within the tray is
independently controlled, which allows the impeller fans to independently operate
within the system. On startup, the fans slowly ramp to the appropriate speed required
for ambient and device operating temperatures.

Installation Guide
Fan failure is indicated on the front the system by means of the alarm LEDs on the
CCM; see section 15.1. In addition, each fan tray has an LED that indicates fan
status. For a full description of the Fan Status LED behavior, see section 15.8.
All impeller fan trays should always be installed and fully operational while the
system is in normal operation. The impeller fan trays are accessed from the rear of
the chassis.
Note: The system is not shipped with impeller fan trays installed.
You must replace the entire impeller fan trays if an individual impeller fan fails; see
section 16.8.
3.2.3.3 PCM Fans
The PCM fans (Figure 23) support Quad PCMs. The cooling fins in the front of the
Quad PCMs require the use of PCM fans. As PCMs are installed into the chassis
from the bottom upward (slot 12 - 1), a cooling channel is created. With Quad PCMs,
the PCM fans draw air down through this air channel and exhaust hot air into the
APEQ exhaust channel; see Figure 24.
The PCM fans turn on when the system power requirements reaches 30kW. The fan
speed varies as a function of power demand.
Figure 23 PCM Fans
hw0281

Installation Guide
Figure 24 PCM Air Flow
The PCM fan speed is directly related to the output of a thermocouple that senses
the air temperature between the PCM fan and PCM12.
When the ambient air temperature is low, the PCM fans remain off—even under very
heavy loads. As soon as the ambient air temperature rises, the fans start running.
Note that under light loads, the ambient air temperature can rise even higher before
the fans start running.
Note: When installed, the status of the PCM fans are always shown as “up” even when they
are not running.

Installation Guide
3.2.3.4 Air Filters
The system has four serviceable air filters:
• CCM air filter; Figure 25

• XCM air filter; Figure 26
• Main air filter drawer; Figure 27
• APEQ-bay air filter; Figure 28
Note: For deployment of HVDC and AC APEQs, the APEQ access panel with APEQ air
filter is not used; see Installing APEQs and Connecting Power, section 8.
The air filters prevent large particles, debris, and dust from entering and circulating
through the system. Filters should be inspected monthly and replaced when
indications of accumulated dust are present. To service air filters, see section 16.1.
Figure 25 CCM Air Filter
hw0142

Installation Guide
Figure 26 XCM Air Filter and Frame Assembly
hw0064
Figure 27 Main System Rear Air Filter Drawer
hw0044

Installation Guide
Figure 28 APEQ Front Access Panel and Air Filter
hw0045

Installation Guide
3.2.4 Impedance Panels
Warning: Impedance panels are required in all empty card slots to ensure proper airflow
path within the chassis, and to control electromagnetic interference. Remove panels only
when replacing with live card assemblies.
Figure 29 Impedance Panels
XCM SFM/CPM XMA

hw0046
The 7950 XRS-20e supports only the blocked variant of the XCM impedance panel
as indicated by the symbol at the bottom-front area of the panel; see Figure 30.
Figure 30 Blocked Symbol

Installation Guide
3.2.5 Cable Management System

The chassis has three cable guides:
• CCM
• Front top
• Front bottom
The front cable guides are mounted on the front of the chassis, above and below the
card cage. Use these to manage fiber-optic cables so they do not interfere with the
insertion or removal of C-XMAs/XMAs and XCMs. Using cable guides prevents
sharp bends that can damage cables or degrade performance. To service cable
guides, see section 16.11.
When two 7950 XRS-20e systems are connected to form an 7950 XRS-40, two
additional cable trays are required in the rear of the chassis to route the optical
interconnect cables. These are shipped along with the optical cable bundle.
3.3 Control and Management

Control and management functions are distributed throughout the system for
scalable control plane performance.by means of the following components:
• Chassis Control Modules, section 3.3.1

• Control Processing Modules, section 3.3.2
• XCMs, section 3.4.2
The CPMs provide all routing and chassis-level control functions for the system.
Routing control functions are integrated with the forwarding plane by means of the
XCMs. Chassis-level control functions are extended to the CCMs, which provide
control and management interfaces to the system.

Installation Guide
3.3.1 Chassis Control Modules

The CCMs provide management and system control connections and indicators. The
CCMs are hot-swappable, field replaceable units (FRUs).
Figure 31 CCM Features
L M A B
K D
J E
H G F hw0098
Table 15 CCM Features
A Captive screws (4x) Secures the CCM in place.

B Status LED For LED states, see section 15.1.1
C ACO/LT The Audible Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test (ACO/LT) button turns off all
external alarm relay control bits until the next new alarm condition and
verifies that the LEDs are operational.
D Temp Chassis over temperature, see section 15.1.2.
E Alarm The Alarm ports are terminal-style connectors used to connect to
external alarm devices that report conditions and trigger alarms.

Installation Guide
Table 15 CCM Features (Continued)
F Compact Flash #1 • Default filename: cf1:

(Internal) • Recommended location for local storage of log and accounting
files.
• A 128 GByte solid state drive.
• CF Status LED, see section 15.1.8.
Compact Flash #2 • Default filename: cf2:
(Slot) • Recommended location for local storage of log and accounting
files.
• To eject a flash card, perform a file shut down and then gently
press the ejector button until the flash card releases.
Compact Flash #3 • Default filename: cf3:
(Slot) • The bootstrap (boot.ldr) and boot options (bof.cfg) images must
be present on compact flash #3.
• To eject a flash card, perform a file shut down and then gently
press the ejector button until the flash card releases.
G RS-232 The RS-232 port is a serial (RJ-45 connector) port used for out-of-band
(OOB) management of the router (also referred to as the console). Use
as a DTE or DCE port for system console connection.
H Mgmt • The Mgmt port is a 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet port, which is an
OOB channel to download images and manage the system. This
port is provisioned with an RJ-45 connector. Use a CAT6
Ethernet cable to connect to the port.
Note: For this release, the port operates at only 10/100 Mb/s.
• For LED information, see section 15.1.6.
I DTE/DCE Set the switch to DTE when connecting to the RS-232 Console port of a
PC with a null modem cable. When the switch is set to DTE, the console
port is acting as a data terminal equipment (DTE) serial port.
Set the switch to DCE when connecting to the RS-232 Console port of
a PC with a straight-through cable. When the switch is set to DCE, the
console port is acting as a data communications equipment (DCE) serial
port.
J Sync-E/1588 Reserved for future use.

Installation Guide
Table 15 CCM Features (Continued)
K OES Optical Extension Shelf ports:

OES1 is used for the GMPLS-UNI IP Control Channel.
OES2 is reserved for future functionality.
L BITS • The BITS port is provisioned with an RJ-45 jack and used for the
network clock source. It is capable of functioning as both an
input and an output port.
• For LED information, see section 15.1.7.
• For port pin assignment information,
see section 17.1.2.
Note: Make sure to use shielded cable when connecting to the BITS
port.
M LCD panel Two-way, rack front system interaction with color TFT flat-panel touch
screen (reserved for future use).
CCM A handles all control and interface functions for CPM A. CCM A is located at
the top-left front section of the chassis. CCM B is located top-right front and is
associated with CPM B.
For 7950 XRS-40, CCM functions are extended to the extension chassis. The four
CCMs are designated CCM A through D.

Installation Guide
3.3.1.1 Managing 7950 XRS-40 Extension Chassis
Once the CPM connection between the master chassis and the extension chassis is
established, all the elements of the extension chassis are managed from the master
chassis.
The CCM console (serial) and Ethernet Management ports on the extension chassis
behave the same as the console port of the master standby CCM and can be used
to set an orphaned 7950 XRS-40 extension chassis back to a standalone chassis.
Only the CPMs in the master chassis behave as the active and standby CPMs for the
system. The CPMs in the extension chassis work with the master CPMs in
supporting limited functions such as system timing and synchronization functions, as
well as basic chassis equipment management tasks.
3.3.1.2 Minimum Requirements
• The CCMs are not factory-installed. They are sold separately. You must
install one CCM for each CPM; 1+1 for full redundancy. The 7950 XRS-20e
system is fully functional with only one operational CCM. If either a CPM or
its associated CCM fails, the standby CPM/CCM becomes operational.
• For 7950 XRS-40, a minimum of one CCM each is required on the master
and extension chassis.
3.3.2 Control Processing Modules

The CPMs provide all routing and chassis-level control functions for the system. The
CPMs directly communicate with the other entities in the system through a direct tap
on the switch fabric (see Figure 4). If one CPM fails, a second maintains real-time
state information for hitless failover.
CPMs are 1+1 redundant. Each CPM contains two multi-core CPU complexes to
support all the routing protocols, and to support all the control functions for the overall
system. For the 7950 XRS-40, the CPMs in the master chassis provide this function
for the entire system.
System state is maintained between CPMs through switch fabric connected

communications. Loss of the active CPM results in hitless failover to the standby
CPM. Routing tables and updates are maintained in real-time on both CPMs.

Installation Guide
Figure 32 CPM
A B D E A
C F hw0099
Table 16 CPM Features
A Captive Two each (top and bottom); used to secure the card in
screws place.
B Ejector Two each (top and bottom); used to seat and disengage
levers the card assembly to and from the midplane.
C Reset A recessed button used to restart the CPM. Insert a
small object such as a pen tip to press the button.
D Status For LED states, see section 15.2.
E E-SATA Reserved for future use
F 1, 2 QSFP+ ports (used to interconnect CPMs in a
7950 XRS-40 system)
CPMs are hot-swappable FRUs. They are installed in the rear of the chassis in slots
A and B.
The system is delivered with two CPMs; 1+1 for full redundancy. It can run with only
one. However, if you remove a CPM for repair or replacement, you must install an air
impedance panel in its place until a replacement card is installed.
Warning: Impedance panels are required in all empty card slots to ensure proper airflow
path within the chassis, and to control electromagnetic interference. Remove panels only
when replacing with live card assemblies.

Installation Guide
3.4 Switching
Switching plane functions are provided by the SFMs. Each forwarding and control
entity in the system sits directly on the switch fabric, allowing for massive bandwidth
to line cards, and control and processing cards.
3.4.1 Switch Fabric Modules

The SFMs receive and direct traffic to the appropriate destinations according to the
routing information. The system uses load-sharing across all available SFMs.
The system utilizes an N+1 redundancy scheme. Seven SFMs are required for full
capacity to all ten XCMs, where the eighth SFM is redundant. Loss of a single fabric
does not cause a loss of system capacity; only in-flight packets on a failed fabric are
affected. Additional fabric failures gracefully degrade performance; each XMA
experiences incrementally less fabric capacity.
On each card, switching ASICs, other chips, and links operate in concert across the
switch fabric so that when components on one card fail, the switching fabric can
gracefully degrade by sharing switching functions across the entire fabric even if only
one SFM remains operational.
There are three SFM models:
• Standalone SFM-X20S-B (no optical cages), see Figure 33

• Standalone SFM2-X20S (no optical cages), see Figure 34
• Multi-chassis Capable SFM, see Figure 35
The SFM2-X20S (FP4-based) is similar to the current SFM-X20S-B (FP3-based)

switch fabric module, but with up to six times more capacity.
The SFM2-X20S and provides up to 2.4T FD capacity to each of the XMA slots
enabling 2.4 T cards to be utilized to their full potential.

Installation Guide
3.4.1.1 Standalone SFM-X20S-B
The SFM-X20S-B is an FP3-based switch fabric module.
Figure 33 Standalone SFM-X20S-B

A B A
Status
C hw0100
Table 17 Standalone SFM-X20S-B Features
screws place.
B Ejector levers Two each (top and bottom); used to seat and disengage
the card assemblies to and from the midplane.
C Status For LED states, see section 15.3.1.

Installation Guide
3.4.1.2 Standalone SFM2-X20S
The SFM-X20S-B is an FP4-based switch fabric module.
You must use the fabric-speed-c command to provision FP4-based SFMs. It is the
only fabric-speed available for the FP4-based SFMs and is required for FP4-based
SFMs to function; see section 9.2.1.1.
For upgrade procedures refer to 7950 XRS-20 and 7950 XRS-20e FP4 Hardware
Upgrade Guide.
Figure 34 Standalone SFM2-X20S

A B A
Status
C hw0313
Table 18 Standalone SFM2-X20S Features
screws place.

Installation Guide
3.4.1.3 Multi-chassis Capable SFM
Figure 35 Multi-chassis Capable SFM

A B D E A
Cable ID
Status
C hw0101
Table 19 Multi-chassis Capable SFM Features
screws place.
D Cable ID For LED states, see section 15.3.2.
E 1 - 14 CXP optical cages.
There are fourteen CXP optical cages on each SFM card for use on 7950 XRS-40
deployment schemes, which for safety reasons should be plugged when not in use.
• The 7950 XRS-20e system requires 8 SFMs; 7+1 for full redundancy.
• For 7950 XRS-40, each 7950 XRS-20e chassis require 8 SFMs (14+2) for full
redundancy.
Warning: Risk of Equipment Damage: Impedance panels are required in all empty card
slots to ensure proper airflow path within the chassis, and to control electromagnetic
interference. Remove panels only when replacing with live card assemblies.

Installation Guide
3.4.2 XCMs
The XCM-X20e (FP3-based) and XCM2-X20e (FP4-based) type XMA Control
Modules (XCMs) fill an entire I/O slot and provide two basic functions:
• Switch fabric interface to the eight SFMs.

• Card-level control plane CPU for the I/O slot.
The XCM-X20e supports:
• a pair of 400 GE XMAs

• a pair of 200 GE C-XMAs
The XCM2-X20e supports:
• a pair of 24-port QSFP28

• a pair of 12-port QSFP-DD
• a pair of 6-port CFP8 2.4T FD
• a pair of 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO
You must use the fabric-speed-c command option to provision FP4-based XCM2.
It is the only fabric-speed available for the FP4-based XCM2 and is required for
FP4-based XCM2 and XMAs to function; see section 10.1.1.1.
The system supports a mix of XCM-X20e (FP3-based) XCMs and XCM2-X20e

(FP4-based) XCMs.
Note: The system does NOT support FP3-based XMAs installed in FP4-based XCMs or
FP4 XMAs installed in FP3-based XCMs.
For upgrade procedures; refer to 7950 XRS-20 and 7950 XRS-20e FP4 Hardware
Upgrade Guide.
Caution: Risk of Injury:
• The XCMs have a large physical form factor, and weighs up to 62 lb (28.12 kg) when
loaded with C-XMAs/XMAs.
• To reduce the risk of injury, install XCMs prior to installing any C-XMAs/XMAs.
Conversely, remove C-XMAs/XMAs prior to removing the associated XCM.

Installation Guide
Figure 36 XCM
C B A B
hw0047
Table 20 XCM Features
A XCM LED For LED states, see section 15.4.

B XMA slots Use for C-XMAs and/or XMAs.
C Version label Indicates XCM version:
• Blank = FP3
• IV = FP4

Installation Guide
3.5 Forwarding
Forwarding plane functions are centered in the C-XMAs/XMAs. They provide cost-
efficient interfaces that support the full range of functional requirements for core IP
routing, Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) and routing, Internet peering,
Infrastructure services and core IP/optical integration.
Two XMA form factors are available:
• 200 GE (FP3) full duplex C-XMA

• 400 GE (FP3) and 2.4T (FP4) full duplex XMAs
3.5.1 C-XMAs/XMAs
The C-XMAs/XMA house the entire set of forwarding plane components and all
associated memories. In addition, C-XMAs/XMAs perform all MAC-layer and
physical-layer functions, and provide the physical interfaces to the I/O cables.
C-XMAs/XMAs support a full line of plugin optics.
The XCMs can house:
• One or two C-XMAs (with mechanical adapters)

• One or two XMAs
• One XMA and one C-XMA (with mechanical adapter).
XMAs include ejection levers for insertion and ejection. Screw fasteners secure them
into the XCM slot.
For descriptions of LED behavior, see section 15.5.
Warning: Risk of Equipment Damage: Impedance panels are required in all empty card
slots to ensure proper airflow path within the chassis, and to control electromagnetic
interference. Remove panels only when replacing with live card assemblies.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.1 C-XMAs
The system supports the following C-XMA types:
• 2-port 100 GE CFP, section 3.5.1.1.1

• 20-port 10 GE SFP+, section 3.5.1.1.2
• 6-port 40 GE QSFP+, section 3.5.1.1.3
• 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP/SFP C-XMA, section 3.5.1.1.4
3.5.1.1.1 2-port 100 GE CFP
The 2-port 100 GE CFP is a 100 Gb/s Ethernet C-XMA with an interface that utilizes
short and medium reach CFP transceivers to interconnect, routers, switches, or
optical switch client-side interfaces.
Figure 37 2-port 100 GE CFP C-XMA
A B C D
hw0102
Table 21 2-port 100 GE CFP C-XMA Features
A Captive screws Two each (top and bottom); used to secure the card in place.
B Ejector lever Two each (top and bottom); used to seat and disengage the card
assemblies to and from the XCM.
C Port 100 GE port; supports CFP optical device.
D Status LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.1.2 20-port 10 GE SFP+
The 20-port 10 GE SFP+ is a 10 Gb/s Ethernet C-XMA.
Figure 38 20-port 10 GE SFP+ C-XMA
A B C D E
hw0103
Table 22 20-port 10 GE SFP+ C-XMA Features
C Port 10 GE port; supports SFP+ optical device.
D Link/Act LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.
E Status LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.1.3 6-port 40 GE QSFP+
The 6-port 40 GE QSFP+ C-XMA 40 Gb/s Ethernet C-XMA.
Figure 39 6-port 40 GE QSFP+ C-XMA

X6-40G-QSFP1
Status
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
A B C D E
hw0104
Table 23 6-port 40 GE QSFP+ C-XMA Features
C Port 40 GE port; supports QSFP+ optical device.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.1.4 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP/SFP C-XMA
The 36/72 GE C-XMA has 36 physical optical cages. Each physical optical cage has
two ports. The optical cage can support either SFP optical devices or cSFP optical
devices. Note that each cSFP optical device has two physical ports, which support a
total of 72 ports.
When you are using SFP transceivers in the 36 cages, only the odd-number port is
valid (1,3,5,….etc). When you are using cSFP transceivers, both even and odd-
number ports are valid.
Figure 40 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP C-XMA
D B
A B C E E F A
hw0105
Table 24 36/72-port 1 GE cSFP C-XMA Features
C Link/Act LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.
D Port numbers Only odd-numbers are valid for SFP optical devices.
Both even and odd-number ports are valid for cSFP optical device.
E Link/Act key Key to Link/Act LEDs for each bank of ports.
F Status LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2 XMAs
The system supports the following XMA types:
• 2-port 100 GE Integrated DWDM, section 3.5.1.2.1

• 4-port 100 GE CXP, section 3.5.1.2.2
• 40-port 10 GE SFP+, section 3.5.1.2.3
• 4-port 100 GE CFP2, section 3.5.1.2.4
• 6-port 400 GE CFP8, section 3.5.1.2.5
• 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO, section 3.5.1.2.6
• Universal 24-port QSFP28, section 3.5.1.2.7
• Universal 12-port QSFP-DD, section 3.5.1.2.8

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.1 2-port 100 GE Integrated DWDM
The 2-port 100 GE integrated DWDM XMA is a coherent 100 GE polarization

multiplexed quadrature phase-shift keying (PM-QPSK) modulation C-band 50 GHz
tunable dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) adapter card. This card has
integrated optics.
Figure 41 2-port 100 GE DWDM XMA

C
A B D E
hw0106
Table 25 2-port 100 GE DWDM XMA Features
C Ports 2 x 100 GE Integrated DWDM ports
D Port LEDs For LED states, see section 15.5.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.2 4-port 100 GE CXP
The 4-port 100 GE is a 100 Gb/s Ethernet XMA with a CXP interface that utilizes
short reach CXP transceivers to interconnect, routers, switches, or optical switch
client-side interfaces. It provides 4x100 GE capacity in the core for P-to-P, and P-to-
PE interconnects.
Figure 42 4-port 100 GE CXP XMA

CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
Do not view directly with
LASER RADIATION
optical instrument
X4-100G-CXP
1
4
CAUTION
Status
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Act
Act
Act
Act
A B C D E
hw0107
Table 26 4-port 100 GE CXP XMA Features
D Port 100 GE port; supports CXP optical device.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.3 40-port 10 GE SFP+
The 40-Port 10 GE is a high density 10 Gb/s Ethernet XMA with SFP+ interfaces that
utilizes short, long and extended reach SFP+ transceivers.
Figure 43 40-port 10 GE SFP+ XMA
Lnk/Act
X4-10G-SFP
Lnk/Act
Status
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
37 38
39 40
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
A B C D E
hw0108
Table 27 40-port 10 GE SFP+ XMA Features
C Port 10 GE port; supports SFP+ optical device.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.4 4-port 100 GE CFP2
The 4-port 100 GE is a 100 Gb/s Ethernet XMA with a CFP2 interface that utilizes
short reach CFP2 transceivers to interconnect, routers, switches, or optical switch
client-side interfaces. It provides 4x100 GE capacity in the core for P-to-P, and P-to-
PE interconnects.
Figure 44 4-port 100 GE CFP2 XMA

C
Link/
Act
A B D E A
hw0109
Table 28 4-port 100 GE CFP2 XMA Features
C Ports 100 GE ports; support CFP2 optical device.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.5 6-port 400 GE CFP8
The 6-port 400 GE CFP8 is an FP4-based XMA supporting different optical

distances.
Beginning in SROS Release 16.0.R1, Nokia introduces licensing for all FP4-based
hardware assemblies. Each XMA supports multiple variants. All variants use the
same card-type or mda-type, but have different license-levels encoded in the
hardware. Each license level specifies the hardware capacity and functional
capabilities for that variant.
Port activation and capacity is determined by the license that is purchased. Licenses
can be purchased to support 4 or 6 connectors with bandwidth speeds of 1.6, or 2.4
Tb/s. Upgrade licenses are available for all variants. The following subsections
describe the XMA options. For more information about licensing for all FP4-based
cards; see section 10.2.
Figure 45 6-port 400 GE CFP8 XMA

C
A B D E A
hw0315
Table 29 6-port 400 GE CFP8 XMA Features
C Connectors 400 GE ports; support CFP8 optical device.
Upgrade Guide.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.6 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO
The 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO is an FP4-based XMA supporting different optical

distances.
can be purchased to support 6 connectors and bandwidth speeds up to 1.2Tb/s.
Upgrade licenses are available for all variants. The following subsections describe
the XMA options. For more information about licensing for all FP4-based cards; see
section 10.2.
Figure 46 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO XMA

C
A B D E A
hw0650
Table 30 6-port 200 GE CFP2-DCO XMA Features
C Connectors Supports 1 x 100 GE or 1 x 200 GE CFP2-DCO optical devices.
Upgrade Guide.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.7 Universal 24-port QSFP28
The Universal 24-port QSFP28 XMA is an FP4-based 2.4T FD XMA offering several
optical options.
can be purchased to support 12, 16, or 24 connectors with bandwidth speeds of 1.2,
1.6, or 2.4 Tb/s. Upgrade licenses are available for all variants. The following
subsections describe the XMA options. For more information about licensing for all
FP4-based cards; see section 10.2.
Figure 47 Universal 24-port QSFP28 XMA
A B C D E
hw0314
Table 31 Universal 24-port QSFP28 XMA Features
D Connectors 2.4T ports; support QSFP28 and optical devices; see Table 32.

Installation Guide
Table 32 Supported Optical Devices
Optics Type
QSFP28 1X100 GE: LR4, SR4, CWDM4, ER4 Lite

QSFP28 10 x 10 GE: MLG-2.0 supporting 10 x 10 breakout; SR, and LR
QSFP+ 1 x 40 GE: LR4, SR4, ER4
QSFP+ 4 x 10 GE: Breakout SR4 and LR4
Upgrade Guide.

Installation Guide
3.5.1.2.8 Universal 12-port QSFP-DD
The Universal 12-port QSFP-DD XMA is an FP4-based 2.4T FD XMA offering

several optical options.
can be purchased to support 8 or 12 connectors with bandwidth speeds of 1.6T,
2.4T, and 2.4T; with 4Tbs of intelligent fan in fan out. Upgrade licenses are available
for all variants. The following subsections describe the XMA options. For more
information about licensing for all FP4-based cards; see section 10.2.
Figure 48 Universal 12-port QSFP-DD XMA
A B C D E
hw0652
Table 33 Universal 12-port QSFP-DDXMA Features
D Connectors 2.4T ports; support QSFP28 optical devices; see Table 32.

Installation Guide
Table 34 Supported Optical Devices
Optics Type
QSFP28 1X100 GE: LR4, SR4, CWDM4, ER4 Lite

QSFP28 10 x 10 GE: MLG-2.0 supporting 10 x 10 breakout; SR, and LR
QSFP28-DD 1 x 400 GE
QSFP28-DD 2 x100 GE
QSFP28-DD 4 x100 GE
QSFP+ 1 x 40 GE: LR4, SR4, ER4
QSFP+ 4 x 10 GE: Breakout SR4 and LR4
Upgrade Guide.

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Intelligent Power Management
Installation Guide
4 Intelligent Power Management

• Configurable Priorities, section 4.1.1
• Operating Modes, section 4.2
• Provisioning APEQs, section 4.3
4.1 Overview
The 7950 router has built-in intelligence to manage power in a predictable manner in
rare under-powered conditions and during system bring-up. The Advanced Power
EQualization and control (APEQ) modules are equipped with control processors that
facilitate communications with other APEQs in the system, as well as with the active
CPM. The APEQs provide real-time voltage and current measurements to the CPM.
This enables the CPM to make intelligent choices when powering the system
modules.
A minimum of five APEQs are required to power the basic chassis elements (fan
trays, SFMs, and CPMs) and bring up the system. When the number of APEQs is
less than five, the APEQs communicate among themselves and prevent the system
from starting up.
The key part of any intelligent power management scheme is to provide a

predetermined outcome in underpowered conditions. This includes protecting the
base system elements such as fan trays, SFMs, and CPMs followed by a prioritized
scheme for protecting the I/O modules (XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs). The intelligence
built into the XRS system hardware provides such a power management scheme.
4.1.1 Configurable Priorities

The router supports an operator-defined priority scheme by which certain modules,
such as IO modules, are brought up or shut down based on their priority when the
system is brought up, or when there is an underpowered condition. Base system
modules such as fan trays, CPM and SFM are protected with high priority.
An operator can define the priority for individual XMA modules. For example, the
operator can assign a higher priority to a card that has upstream network-facing ports
compared to a card that has downstream ports. An operator must assign a priority
value to each card using a range of numbers from 1 to 200. The lowest number has
the highest priority. The default priority is 150. The priority number range from 1 to

Intelligent Power Management 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
100 should be used for modules considered essential for system operation. These
modules are not considered for powering down during underpowered conditions.
Lower priority values of 101 to 200 should be used for non-essential modules. Cards
with the highest numerical value (lowest priority) will be shut down first in the case of
sub-optimum power conditions and brought up when power conditions improve or
during reboot.
If no priorities are configured, or more than one card is configured with the same
priority level, the tie breaker is the slot number; the higher the slot number, the lower
the priority. Within a slot, the higher card number has the lower priority.
For base system elements, such as fan trays, SFMs, and CPMs, the power manager
will not shed the power load. They will remain up even though there is not enough
power for them.
4.1.2 Power Capacity and Requirement

The power to the XRS system is provided through APEQ modules. The system will
operate based on the installed APEQs. If there are not enough APEQs provisioned
to support the provisioned power requirements, an alarm is raised until the operator
either provisions enough APEQs or deconfigures enough I/O modules (XCMs, C-
XMAs, and XMAs); for example:
9 2014/01/07 07:28:40.11 UTC MINOR: CHASSIS #2115 Base Power Zone 1

The provisioned power capacity can no longer support configured devices.
When the alarm condition is resolved, the system issues a clearing message; for
example:
The provisioned power capacity now supports configured devices.
For the rules for provisioning APEQ modules, see section 4.3.1. The cumulative
power available from the active APEQ modules is referred to as System Power
Capacity.
Note: When an APEQ module is installed and carries power, the system uses the power
from the APEQ module regardless of the provisioned status of the module.

Installation Guide
The system power requirement is calculated by the cumulative total of the power
requirement (worst case) of each of the system modules. For IO modules, such as
XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs, if they are provisioned, they are included in the total
power requirement even if the modules are not installed because you could insert
them at any time during the system operation. The actual power consumed could be
very different based on the presence of the modules and the environmental
conditions. The cumulative worst-case power for all system modules including the
provisioned modules is referred to as Provisioned Power Requirement.
The power requirements used in the calculation for fans may be lower than the
published worst case requirements for fan trays. When all three fan trays are
operational, the maximum power used by each of the fan trays will be less than worst
case power usage of two fan trays. When one of the fan trays fails or is removed, the
fans in the remaining fan-tray will speed up to compensate, utilizing more power in
the process. However, the combined power usage will always be equal to, or lower
than the power requirements used in the power calculations.
For power management considerations, the system power capacity is typically

compared to the provisioned power requirement.

Installation Guide
4.2 Operating Modes

The system supports the following power-management mode command options:
• None, section 4.2.1

• Basic, section 4.2.2
• Advanced, section 4.2.3
Note: For information about power-related commands, refer to the current edition of
Interface Configuration Guide.
4.2.1 None
When the power-management mode command option is set to none, there is no
management of power to modules. The router will bring up as many provisioned
modules (in order of priority) as possible, based on the power available from the
APEQs installed, with no power held in reserve for redundancy (N+0).
To ensure there is enough power to maintain normal system operation, the operator
must calculate the available system power (based on the number of APEQs
installed) against the total power required by all operationally up modules, using the
published power consumption values; see section 5.4.1.
In this mode, no gradual shut down of active XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs is enforced.
No spare power capacity is reserved and any APEQ failure may result in brownouts
or card failures.
4.2.2 Basic
When the power-management mode command option is set to basic, the router will
bring up as many provisioned modules (in order of priority) as possible, while
reserving enough power capacity to ensure zero impact if an APEQ fails or is
removed.

Installation Guide
The power management system calculates the cumulative power required by adding
the worst case power requirement of all the individual modules within the system.
When a single APEQ fails, there is no impact to the operation of the system.
However, any additional APEQ failures or removals could result in the total available
power going below the calculated cumulative power required for the system. In this
case, the power management system starts shutting down the IO modules starting
with the lowest priority, until the calculated cumulative power required is lower than
the total available power.
The default power-management mode command option is basic.
4.2.3 Advanced
When the power-management mode command option is set to advanced, the
router will bring up as many provisioned modules (in order of priority) as possible,
using the N+1 algorithm similar to basic mode.
However, when there is an APEQ failure, the router will try to maintain the N+1
status. This means enough power capacity will be held in reserve to handle another
APEQ failure without brownouts. If there is not enough power to maintain the N+1
state, the power management system will start shutting down IO modules starting
with the lowest priority until the N+1 state is reached.
Note: When reserving power in Basic or Advanced modes, if there are APEQs of different
power capacities available, the highest-rated APEQ is always used in the calculations.
4.2.4 Power Safety Level

The Power Safety Level is a critical level, which when exceeded causes the system
to start shutting down IO modules.
The power usage of a module can vary depending on the ambient temperature,
traffic, and other conditions. The power management system uses the worst case
power requirement for calculating the power needed for a module, which is usually
higher than the typical power usage for the module. Note that where the system is
equipped with modules of different power ratings the power requirement of the
highest-rated module is used for this power calculation.

Installation Guide
The power management system calculates the cumulative power required by adding
the worst case power requirement of all the individual modules within the system. If
the available power drops below the calculated cumulative power, the power
management system starts shutting down the IO modules in the order of priority.
Because the actual power usage of the modules is typically lower than the worst case
power requirement, this could result in the system starting preventative shut down of
system modules even when there is ample power available. To avoid this condition,
operators are allowed to set a Power Safety Level.
The operator can determine the Power Safety Level by reviewing the typical power
capacity provided for the modules and also fine-tune it by monitoring the actual
power usage over a period of time.
The Power Safety Level is a percentage of the calculated worst case power
requirement value. It is set to 100% by default. After a Power Safety Level is
configured by the operator, both the Basic and Advanced modes use the Power
Safety Level as a reference for calculating the power redundancy using the N+1
algorithm during start up and recovery from underpowering.
In both Basic and Advanced modes, the system requires N+1 when rebooting
equipment on boot up or recovery from underpowering. The only difference between
the two modes is the point at which the system starts shutting down IO cards when
losing power. In Basic mode the system shuts down IO cards when power capacity
drops below the Power Safety Level. In Advanced mode, the system starts shutting
down IO cards when the power capacity drops below the Power Safety Level + Max
rated APEQ. When recovering from power depression, the system always requires
Power Safety Level + Max rated APEQ in both modes. This is also true when the
Power Safety Level is configured as 100%.
4.2.5 Power Safety Alert

The Power Safety Alert occurs at a power level, in watts, above the Power Safety
Level, to provide a warning that the available power is getting close to the Power
Safety Level. The warning is provided in the form of a minor alarm.
Note: Power Safety Alert is assigned an absolute value in watts in addition to the Power
Safety Level.

Installation Guide
The minor Power Safety Alert alarm is generated when the system power capacity
(in watts) drops below the Power Safety Level + the Power Safety Alert value. For
example, consider a system where the provisioned power requirement is 10,000 W,
the Power Safety Level is 70%, and the Power Safety Alert value is 2000 W. The
Power Safety Alert value is a wattage relative to the Power Safety Level and its
actual wattage in this example is 10 000 x 0.70 + 2000 = 9000 W. Therefore, the
alarm will be generated when the system power capacity drops below 9000 Watts.
In this case, the Power Safety Alert alarm would appears as follows:
2013/09/25 04:55:33.82 UTC MINOR: CHASSIS #2107 Base Power Zone 1

The peak nodal power for zone 1 consumption dropped below the configured safety alert
threshold of 9000 watts
4.2.6 Sample Scenario

Figure 49 shows a sample scenario of events that trigger system-level alarms and
operational changes. This sample scenario is designed to provide a better
understanding of system behavior when the power-management mode command
option is set to basic.

Installation Guide
Figure 49 Sample Scenario
Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 Event 4
APEQ Failed APEQ Failed + APEQ Failed +

A kW Alarm Alarm TCA Critical Alarm
APEQ Fails Add XMAs APEQ Fails APEQ Fails

Alarm Level
A-1 kW A-1 kW
W 11500 W 11500 W 11500
W 10500 W 10500 A-2 kW
S 9200 S 9200 S 9200
S 8400 S 8400
P 8300 P 8300 P
P 7300 P 7300 A-3 kW
P 7800
Power Down XMA (-500W)
5+2 APEQ 5+1 APEQ 5+1 APEQ 5+0 APEQ 4+0 APEQ Reduced
10 XMAs 10 XMAs 10+2 XMAs 12 XMAs 12-1 XMAs Operation
al_0200
Starting conditions:
• 7 APEQs (2 kW each) provisioned (see section 4.3) and installed in chassis

providing a power capacity of 14 kW (Tag A).
• 6 XCMs installed, each with 2 XMAs, for a worst-case power requirement of
10.5 kW (Tag W).
• Power Safety Level set at 80% of worst-case power requirement: 8.4 kW
(Tag S).
• Peak average power usage (Tag P) has been reported at 7.3 kW.

Installation Guide
Events:
• Event 1
One APEQ is lost (A-1), which drops the power capacity to 12 kW. This does
not exceed the worst-case Power Safety Level or the Power Safety Alert
level. An alarm indicating the failed APEQ is raised; see section 4.4.
Note: No alarm is raised when an APEQ is shut down in software. Major or critical alarms
are raised only for physical failures or loss of power input.
• Event 2
Two XMAs are added to the system configuration raising the worst-case
power requirement value (Tag W) to 11.5 kW. Because the Power Safety
Level (Tag S) is a percentage of the worst-case value, this change also
moves the Power Safety Level up to 9.2 kW. The measured peak average
power usage (Tag P) is also now reported at 8.3 kW.
• Event 3
One more APEQ is lost (A-2), which drops the available power capacity to
10KW. Because the power capacity (10 kW) remains above the Power Safety
Level (9.2 kW), the current set of XMAs remains operationally up.
• Event 4
One more APEQ is lost (A-3), which drops the available power capacity to 8
kW. This power level is below the Power Safety Level (9.2 kW), which raises
a major alarm; see section 4.4. At this point, the system begins shutting down
C-XMAs and XMAs—and XCMs if required—starting with the lowest priority
XMA; refer to the power-priority-level command description in Interface
Configuration Guide.
When the power-management mode command option is set to advanced, the

C-XMAs, XMAs, and corresponding XCMs are shut down until the power
requirement drops below the level where there is the power capacity of one APEQ to
spare.
In the sample scenario (Figure 49), the Power Safety Alert could be configured
(specified in watts) to get a minor alarm before the Power Safety Level is crossed.

Installation Guide
4.3 Provisioning APEQs

Each APEQ must be provisioned for peq-type and input-power-mode.
Note:
• The term peq as it appears in CLI syntax refers to APEQ.

• For information about power-related commands, refer to the current edition of Interface
Configuration Guide.
For example, peq-type attributes include:
• apeq-dc-2200/2800
• apeq-dc-4275
• apeq-hvdc-3000
• apeq-ac-3000
• apeq-ac-4400
• apeq-hvdc-4400
Even if the APEQ is not provisioned in the system, the APEQs that are installed in
the system are used in the power calculation and the power from the APEQ is
utilized. Nokia recommends that you provision the APEQ modules in the system to
receive appropriate alarms.
When an AC APEQ is installed or when a 60A/80A APEQ is used in 80A mode, the
APEQ must be provisioned. Otherwise the installed APEQ modules will not be used
in the system power calculations. If all installed APEQ modules are not properly
provisioned, some of the line-cards may not be brought up.
4.3.1 Provisioning Rules

• If a provisioned APEQ is not installed (SR OS cannot communicate with it),
fails, or is removed, an alarm condition is raised. To clear the alarm, install an
APEQ, or change the provisioning for the APEQ (using the PEQ-type
command).
• If a provisioned APEQ is installed, but its power rating is below the required
power capacity of the APEQ; an alarm condition will be raised that requires
the correct APEQ to be installed. Alternatively, the provisioning can be
changed. Power from the APEQ will be utilized by the router.

Installation Guide
• If a provisioned APEQ is installed but it is rated to supply more power

capacity than the provisioning, a log event will be raised to indicate that the
APEQ has been installed and has a power capacity surplus. The calculation
of available power must be in accordance with the provisioned APEQs.
Power from the APEQ will be utilized by the router.
• If the installed APEQ is identical to the provisioning, it will be utilized as
specified and a log event will be raised to indicate that this APEQ has been
installed. In the calculation of available power, the provisioned value will be
used. Power from the APEQ will be utilized by the router.
• If an APEQ is de-provisioned, a log event will be raised to indicate that this
APEQ has been de-provisioned. When APEQs are de-provisioned without
shutting them down, the APEQ power capacity is used in the available power
calculation.
• If an APEQ is administratively shut down, it is removed from the available
power calculation, but power capacity from the APEQ will continue to be
utilized by the router.
• Provisioning AC and DC APEQ modules is not allowed. Even when one AC
APEQ module is detected at system startup, the system is considered to be
an AC system. Provisioning any DC APEQ after that point will not be allowed.

Installation Guide
4.4 Alarms
This section provides detailed information on the following alarms raised as a
function of intelligent power management:
• Minor Alarm-Level Condition, section 4.4.1

• Major Alarm-Level Condition, section 4.4.2
• Critical Alarm-Level Condition, section 4.4.3
Note: No alarm is raised when an APEQ is shut down in software. Major or critical alarms
are raised only for physical failures or loss of power input.
4.4.1 Minor Alarm-Level Condition

When the operational state of any system module changes and does not cause the
router to reduce its ability to maintain the current operational configuration, the
system raises a minor alarm. This is an informational message to report the impact
of that change on the router. The message includes the actual wattage used against
the system power capacity; for example:
2013/09/25 04:55:33.82 UTC MINOR: CHASSIS #2107 Base Power Zone 1

The peak nodal power for zone 1 consumption dropped below the configured safety alert
threshold of 9000 watts
example:
The provisioned power capacity now supports configured devices.
Note: The Minor alarm-level condition may persist if the trigger conditions have not been
resolved.

Installation Guide
4.4.2 Major Alarm-Level Condition

If an APEQ becomes unavailable (failure or removal), but it does not change the
existing operational mode for the router, then only a Minor alarm-level condition is
raised and maintained until the APEQ is again operational as provisioned; or the
configuration for the APEQ is removed. This represents moving from an N+n to an
N+1, or N condition.
If not all modules can be accommodated within power budget, the system raises a
Major alarm-level condition. At this alarm-level, the following conditions are true:
1. No new XCMs, C-XMAs, or XMAs will be powered up or rebooted regardless

of their priority.
2. All XCMs that do not have operational XMAs will be shut down.
3. Polling rate of the remaining APEQs will increase to reduce the reaction time
to another APEQ failure or removal.
4. The operator can modify the configuration by manually changing the status
of modules.
This alarm condition can be cleared by provisioning and/or installing sufficient

APEQs to upgrade the available power to accommodate the remaining XCMs, C-
XMAs, and XMAs that are provisioned.
When the operational state of any system module changes that causes the router to
exceed its power budget, Intelligent Power Management raises major alarm-level
informational messages to report the impact of the change on the router; for
example:
2013/09/25 04:56:42.22 UTC MAJOR: CHASSIS #2094 Base Power Zone 1

The system can no longer support configured devices. Power capacity dropped to 12000
example:
2013/09/25 04:56:42.22 UTC MAJOR: CHASSIS #2094 Base Power Zone 1

The system has reached a sustainable power capacity.
Note: The Major alarm-level condition may persist if the trigger conditions have not been
resolved.

Installation Guide
4.4.3 Critical Alarm-Level Condition

If one or more operational APEQs fail or are removed from the system and the
available power no longer supports the currently operational hardware, the system
raises a critical alarm-level condition. At this alarm level, the system performs the
following actions:
1. Shuts down all XCMs that have no operational C-XMAs, or XMAs.

2. Shuts down the lowest priority C-XMA, or XMA provided that it is not in the 1
to 100 range.
3. If sufficient power is not available to run remaining equipment, repeats Steps
1 and 2.
4. If no more power can be saved and the system remains with a shortage of
power, a system-level brownout is possible.
This alarm can be cleared by provisioning and/or populating sufficient APEQs to

upgrade the available power level to accommodate essential XCMs, C-XMAs, and
XMAs that are provisioned.
When the operational state of any system module changes, that can cause the router
to exceed its power budget and thereby reduce its ability to maintain the current
operational configuration. In that case, Intelligent Power Management raises critical
alarm-level informational messages to report the impact of the change on the router;
for example:
2013/09/25 04:57:24.32 UTC CRITICAL: CHASSIS #2096 Base Power Zone 1

The system has reached critical power capacity. Increase available power now.
example:
2013/09/25 04:57:24.32 UTC CRITICAL: CHASSIS #2096 Base Power Zone 1
The system has reached a sustainable power capacity for critical equipment.

Installation Guide
4.5 Provisioning and Activating XCMs, C-XMAs,

and XMAs
The XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs must be provisioned before they can be considered
for activation.
When the system establishes that the module is properly configured, sufficient
available power must be available before an XCM, C-XMAs, or XMA is rebooted. If
powering up any module lifts the power usage above the available power threshold,
the module will not be booted and a major alarm-level condition will be raised;
see section 4.4.2.
4.5.1 Shutting Down XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs

To shed the power load on the system, the operator must manually de-provision
XCMs, C-XMAs, and XMAs. If the system is in power depression state, the operator
sets the card priority to a non-essential level (101 to 200) and the power manager
automatically sheds the power load.
4.5.2 Power-save Mode

The power-save command enables power-save mode on a specific XCM when it is
not in use. Power-save mode allows an XCM to be installed and configured in a
platform for future use, while having minimal impact on the overall power
consumption. The XCM placed in power-save mode is forced into an idle state to
consume minimal power. The power-save command resets the XCM and then
disallows the download of a software image when the XCM comes back up. To
enable power-save mode, the desired XCM must first be shut down then placed into
power-save mode. In this mode, the XCM is not counted in the intelligent power
management budget.
Note:
• XCMs set to power-save mode do not pass traffic.

• An individual XMA cannot be placed in power-save mode.

Installation Guide
4.5.2.1 Setting Power-save Mode
The XCM must be shut down before it can be put in power-save mode.
Use the following commands to enable power-save mode on an XCM:

*A:Dut-A# configure card 1 shutdown
*A:Dut-A# configure card 1 power-save
When the XCM is placed in power-save mode, it will reboot and will be held in the
booting state consuming minimal power.
*A:Dut-B# show card state
===============================================================================
Card State
===============================================================================
Slot/ Provisioned Type Admin Operational Num Num Comments
Id Equipped Type (if different) State State Ports MDA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 xcm2-x20 down booting 2 Pwr Save
1/1 x24-100g-qsfp28:he2400g up provisioned 24
(not equipped)
1/2 x24-100g-qsfp28:he2400g up provisioned 24
(not equipped)
2 xcm-x20 up up 2
2/1 cx20-10g-sfp up up 20
A cpm-x20 up up Active
B cpm-x20 up up Standby
===============================================================================
*A:Dut-B#

Installation Guide
4.5.2.2 Disabling Power-save Mode
When the XCM is brought out of power-save mode, it will reboot and load
successfully, subject to any power-management restrictions and available power.
*A:Dut-A# configure card 1 no power-save

*A:Dut-A# configure card 1 no shutdown
Once the XCM has booted, it will again be online and in service.
*A:Dut-B# show card state
===============================================================================
Card State
===============================================================================
Slot/ Provisioned Type Admin Operational Num Num Comments
Id Equipped Type (if different) State State Ports MDA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 xcm2-x20 up up 2
1/1 x24-100g-qsfp28:he2400g up up 24
1/2 x24-100g-qsfp28:he2400g up up 24
2 xcm-x20 up up 2
A cpm-x20 up up Active
B cpm-x20 up up Standby
===============================================================================
*A:Dut-B#

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis System Specifications
Installation Guide
5 System Specifications
• Chassis Specifications, section 5.1
• Physical Component Specifications, section 5.2
• Environmental Specifications, section 5.3
• System Power Specifications, section 5.4
5.1 Chassis Specifications

The overall height requirements are 44RU (rack units). Ground clearance will vary
from rack to rack, and does not affect RU calculation.
5.1.1 Physical Chassis Specifications
Table 35 Physical Chassis Specifications
Parameter Description
Chassis weight (empty) 442 lb (200.49 kg)

Chassis weight (loaded) 1,346 lb (610.55 kg)
Mounting • Mount in 19-inch equipment four-post rack.
• Bracket ears are factory installed to front-
mount the chassis in a 19-inch rack. No mid-
mount is available for this chassis.
• Use four rear mounting brackets on each side.
See Figure 66 for measured space between
mounting brackets.
Clearance (measured • Front: 7.7 in. (19.6 cm)
from mounting brackets • Rear: 3.9 in. (9.9 cm)
to cable guides)

System Specifications 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
5.2 Physical Component Specifications
Table 36 Physical Component Specifications
CPM
Dimensions Height: 22.2 in. (56.39 cm)
Width: 1.59 in. (4.04 cm)
Depth: 8.62 in. (21.89 cm)
Weight 10.6 lb (4.8 kg)
SFM
Width: 1.59 in. (4.04 cm)
Depth: 9.44 in. (23.97 cm)
XCM
Width: 1.59 in. (4.04 cm)
Depth: 23.55 in. (59.81 cm)
Weight 28.60 lb (12.97 kg)
C-XMA
Width: 1.69 in. (4.29 cm)
Depth: 18.14 in. (46.07 cm)
XMA
Width: 1.69 in. (4.29 cm)
Depth: 18.14 in. (46.07 cm)

Installation Guide
Table 36 Physical Component Specifications (Continued)
Mechanical Adapter
Width: 1.6 in. (4.06 cm)
Depth: 11.3 in. (28.7 cm)
Fan tray
Width: 5.34 in. (13.56 cm)
Depth: 32.07 in. (81.46 cm)
Weight 26 lb (11.80 kg)
APEQ
Width: 4.04 in. (10.26 cm)
Depth: 22.95 in. (58.29 cm)
Weight APEQ-DC-2200/2800: 6.61 lb (3.0 kg)
APEQ-HVDC-3000: 6.83 lb (3.1 kg)
APEQ-AC-3000: 6.83 lb (3.1 kg)
APEQ-AC-4400: 6.83 lb (3.1 kg)
APEQ-HVDC-4400: 6.83 lb (3.1 kg)
PIM
Width: 17.55 in. (44.57 cm)
Depth: 6.01 in. (15.26 cm)
PCM
Width: 10.06 in. (25.55 cm)
Depth: 8.34 in. (21.18 cm)

Installation Guide
Table 36 Physical Component Specifications (Continued)
PCM Fan
Width: 10.06 in. (25.55 cm)
Depth: 8.34 in. (21.18 cm)
5.3 Environmental Specifications
Table 37 Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Normal operation 41 to 104°F (5 to 40°C)
Short term 23 to 122ºF (–5 to 50ºC)
Altitude
Maximum altitude 200 ft (61 m) below sea level and up to 13,123 ft (4000
m) at 86°F (30°C).
Humidity
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (non-condensing)
Short term 5 to 95% (non-condensing)

Installation Guide
5.4 System Power Specifications

This section describes how to calculate the total power consumption of your system
and the number of APEQs you need to support the components and fans in the
chassis.
5.4.1 Calculating the Component Power Consumption

This section describes how to calculate the total amount of power your system
consumes.
Note: The power consumption values provided in this section are for planning purposes
only. The actual power consumption is expected to be lower than the figures shown in the
tables.
The base system component power consumption values are calculated based on a
fully loaded system under the temperature and load conditions; see Table 38.
To calculate the power consumption value for the base system, pick the values
(under the conditions for which you would like to calculate the power consumption)
for the following base system components from the table and add the values:
• Impeller fan trays (3 each)

• CCM (2 each)
• CPM (2 each)
• SFM (8 each)
To this base system power consumption value, add the power consumption values
for the total number of XCMs, C-XMAs/XMAs installed in the system to get the total
component power (TCP) consumption value for the entire system.

Installation Guide
5.4.2 Power Consumption Values

Power consumption values are based on specific conditions, such as the line rate of
traffic and the operating temperature of the components and modules. Table 38
describes the power ratings and conditions.
Table 38 Power Rating and Conditions
Rating Conditions
Idle Slot and card placed into power-save mode and consuming minimal
power
25C Typical installation at 50% line rate with an Internet mix (IMIX) at 25°C
(77°F)
40C 1 Traffic load at 75% line rate with an IMIX at 40°C (104°F)
50C 2 Traffic load at 100% line rate with an IMIX at 50°C (122°F)
Notes:
1. Normal long term operational maximum.

2. Short term operational maximum.
Note: Cards and systems are subject to power consumption variability based on component
tolerances, fan filter condition, traffic patterns, service definitions, and relative humidity. As
a result, Nokia recommends adding a 5% power margin to account for such variability.
5.4.3 Component Power Consumption

To calculate power consumption for the entire chassis, add up the wattage for each
of the components installed in the system. This includes chassis components (fan
trays and CCM), CPMs, SFMs, XCMs, and C-XMAs or XMAs.
Table 39 System Component Power Consumption Values in Watts
7950 XRS-20e Module Idle 25C 40C 50C
Impeller fan tray 231 1 604 1 1768 1 2871 1

CCM 20 22 23 23

Installation Guide
Table 39 System Component Power Consumption Values in Watts (Continued)
CPM 203 206 211 220

SFM2 standalone 1.2T 72 199 209 212
SFM multi-chassis capable 0 196 N/A 2 224
XCM2-X20 1.2T 3 55 6 255 274 287
XCM2-X20 1.6T 3 55 6 271 292 304
XCM2-X20 2.4T 3 55 6 302 324 350
C-XMA - 7950 XRS 2pt 100 GE CFP 4 0 390 396 5 408
C-XMA - 7950 XRS 72pt 1GE CSFP/SFP 4 0 291 307 5 316
C-XMA - 7950 XRS 20pt 10 GE SFP+ 4 0 418 427 5 440
C-XMA - 7950 XRS 6pt 40 GE QSFP+ 4 0 365 405 5 418
XMA - 7950 XRS 4pt 100 GE CXP 4 0 579 616 5 635
XMA - 7950 XRS 40pt 10 GE SFP+ 4 0 628 665 5 685
XMA - 7950 XRS 4pt 100 GE CFP2 4 0 604 670 5 691
XMA - 7950 XRS 2pt 100 GE INT DWDM (with 0 460 N/A 2 540
integrated optics)
XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.2T 12pt QSFP28 0 479 538 574
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.6T 12pt QSFP28 0 566 614 632
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSFP28 0 733 801 841
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.6T 4pt CFP8 0 598 625 670
CR/ER/HE 4

Installation Guide
Table 39 System Component Power Consumption Values in Watts (Continued)
XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 6pt CFP8 0 740 813 835

CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS 1.6T 8pt QSDP-DD 0 543 571 597
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD 0 724 771 815
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD to 4T 0 742 784 821
CR/ER/HE 4
XMA - 7950 XRS - 6pt CFP2-DCO 0 373 401 422
CR/ER/HE 4
Notes:
1. When system equipped with four FP4-based cards.

2. Not measured at 75% line rate; 100% only.
3. Same XMA-type in both XCM slots.
4. C-XMA/XMA power consumption does not include pluggable optical module
power. Contact your Nokia customer support representative for these values.
5. Estimate only; not measured.
6. The maximum power consumption is 55W. When the XCM2 is in power-save
mode, power values are not readable, so will display as null in CLI.
7. The C-XMA/XMA power consumption values may not represent a complete
and comprehensive list. New consumption values are added to this guide as
they become available. Please check back to later releases of this guide for
new power values and conditions.

Installation Guide
5.4.4 APEQ Electrical Specifications
Table 40 APEQ Electrical Specifications
APEQ Type Electrical Characteristics Value
APEQ-DC-2200/2800 Input voltage range –40 to –72 VDC
Input current 1 60/80A
Output power 2 2200/2800W
Power efficiency 3 92%
APEQ-DC-4275 Input voltage range –40 to –72 VDC
Input current 1 60A per feed
Output power 2 4275W
APEQ-HVDC-3000 Input voltage range 260 to 400 VDC
Input current 1 13A
APEQ-AC-3000 Input voltage range 200 to 240 V
Input current 1 16A
Frequency range 50/60 HZ

Installation Guide
Table 40 APEQ Electrical Specifications (Continued)
APEQ Type Electrical Characteristics Value
APEQ-AC-4400 Input voltage range 200 to 240V
Input current 1 26A
Frequency range 50/60 HZ
APEQ-HVDC-4400 Input voltage range 260 to 400 VDC
Input current 1 18A
Frequency range N/A
Notes:
1. Maximum current (APEQ full load, low input line)

2. The output power value is a factor used to calculate the number of APEQs
you require to power your system.
3. Value measured at 100% load

Installation Guide
5.4.5 APEQ Requirement Calculations

When determining the plant power feed requirement for the system, you must take
into account the efficiency of your APEQ, as listed in Table 40, then multiply the Total
Calculated Power (TCP) by the appropriate efficiency factor.
For example:
APEQ APEQ Efficiency Calculation

Efficiency Factor
APEQ-AC-3000 93% 1.07 TCP x 1.07 = system power requirement
APEQ-HVDC-3000 95% 1.05 TCP x 1.05 = system power requirement
For N + 1 APEQ redundancy, add one APEQ to your system. In an N + 1

configuration, the system is protected against the failure of one APEQ.

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Site Preparation
Installation Guide
6 Site Preparation
• Warnings and Notes, section 6.1
• 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Separation Guidelines, section 6.2
• Equipment Rack Specifications, section 6.3
• Safety Considerations, section 6.4
• Installation Locations, section 6.5
• Installation Site Assessment, section 6.6
Note: Installing an 7950 XRS-40 is in general equivalent to installing two separate

7950 XRS-20e systems. One key additional consideration for 7950 XRS-40 is the distance
between the two 7950 XRS-20e systems; see section 6.2.
Danger: The 7950 XRS-20e uses a fiber-optic communications method and are a Class 1
and Class 1M laser product. Additionally, there are no user-serviceable parts in the
7950 XRS-20e. Installation and servicing of the system must be done only by trained
service personnel familiar with potential electrical, mechanical, and laser radiation hazards.
Warning: Impedance panels are required in all empty card slots to prevent excess dust
accumulation and to help control airflow and electromagnetic interference.
Caution:
• Do not assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Be sure to disconnect
power to the equipment rack and external cables before installing or removing the
router.
• Do not install equipment that appears to be damaged.
• Install this unit in a restricted area that is only accessible by authorized service
personnel.
• Do not stack any other equipment on top of the router. The chassis exhausts hot air from
the top surface and is not designed to support weight on top of it.

Site Preparation 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note:
• Prepare the equipment rack and site before installing the chassis. Plan the router
placement near the power sources and network interface connections.
• Remove paint and other non-conductive coatings from surfaces between the mounting
hardware and the rack. Clean surfaces with an antioxidant before you install your router
in the rack. The path between the chassis and the rack must be of sufficiently low
impedance to facilitate the operation of any circuit over-current protection and it must
be capable of safely conducting any fault current likely to be imposed.
• The chassis is suitable for connection to a CBN or IBN grounding system.
• The chassis is intended to be located in a Central Office.
• An empty chassis weighs approximately 442 lb (200.49 kg); without impeller fan trays
installed.
• Use the dolly on which the chassis is mounted to move the router.
• To provide necessary stability, ensure that the equipment rack is properly secured to
the floor and ceiling, in accordance with local requirements. Ceiling brackets are useful
to provide additional stability.
• The equipment rack must be properly grounded.
• Install components after the chassis is installed in the rack.
• Maintain a clearance of at least 26 in. (66 cm) in front and 34 in. (86.4 cm) behind the
router to ensure adequate room for component installation and service.
• Maintain adequate air flow to and from all equipment in the rack, ensuring that nothing
impedes with intake or exhaust air flow.
• The chassis includes integral front rack-mounting points for mounting in a 19-inch four-
post equipment rack. In addition, eight rear rack-mounting brackets are provided in the
accessory kit.
• Impedance panels are required in all empty card slots to prevent excess dust
• The 7950 XRS-20e is suitable for use in a telecommunication facility such as a Central
Office and locations where the NEC applies.
• The chassis should only be installed in a restricted access area (such as a dedicated
equipment room or equipment closet, or other restricted-access area) an in accordance
with Articles 110-26 and 110-27 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, or in
accordance with the applicable code in the country of installation.

Installation Guide
6.2 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Separation Guidelines

One key consideration when installing two 7950 XRS-20e systems to form a
7950 XRS-40 is the distance between the two systems. The SFM and CPM
interconnect cables are available in 10m or 30m length. Because these cables will
need to be routed through the cable guides, the two 7950 XRS-20e systems need to
be close enough to each other for the cables to comfortably reach between them.
Figure 50 Master and Extension Chassis Separation Guidelines

H
V V
Master Extension
hw0134
Note: When determining the shelf separation H, please be conservative and make sure that
there is adequate cable length available for connecting the two chassis.

Installation Guide
As shown in Figure 50:
• M – the vertical distance up to the top of the chassis, which is 53 in.

(134.62 cm)
• E – the vertical distance down from the cable routing ladder to the top of the
chassis, which is 26 in. (66.04 cm).
• V – the vertical rise from the top of the chassis to the cable routing ladder.
This needs to be measured.
The maximum separation between 7950 XRS chassis (H) is determined by:
H= cable length - M - E - 2V
Substituting values for E and M; which are known, the maximum separation between
two chassis is determined by:
H= 288 in.- 2*V or H= 7.32m - 2*V

Installation Guide
6.3 Equipment Rack Specifications

The router must be installed in a rack. It cannot operate from the floor.
The chassis is 44RU high. Each chassis requires a dedicated rack. It can be front
mounted in many types of racks, including the following:
• Standard 19-inch (48.26 cm) four-post equipment rack

• Standard telco rack (four-post)
Follow the equipment rack manufacturer’s instructions for proper rack installation.
The equipment rack rail mounting holes must align with the mounting holes on the
front chassis mounting points.
6.3.1 Chassis Dimensions

Site engineering teams can use the information in this section for space planning.
Table 41 lists overall chassis dimensions based on configuration.
Table 41 Overall Chassis Dimensions
Chassis Variant Protection Dimensions

Panels
7950 XRS-20e Universal 76.94 x 17.55 x 41.86 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)

(195.43 x 44.60 x 106.31 cm)
7950 XRS-20e Universal X 76.94 x 19.70 x 42.72 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 50.04 x 108.52 cm)
7950 XRS-40 Universal 76.94 x 17.55 x 41.86 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 44.60 x 106.31 cm)
7950 XRS-40 Universal X 76.94 x 19.70 x 42.74 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 50.04 x 108.57 cm)
7950 XRS-20e AC 76.94 x 17.55 x 37.40 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 44.60 x 94.99 cm)

Installation Guide
Table 41 Overall Chassis Dimensions (Continued)
Chassis Variant Protection Dimensions

Panels
7950 XRS-20e AC X 76.94 x 19.70 x 39.24 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)

(195.43 x 50.04 x 99.67 cm)
7950 XRS-40 AC 76.94 x 17.55 x 41.26 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 44.60 x 104.80 cm)
7950 XRS-40 AC X 76.94 x 19.70 x 42.74 in. (H x W x D) (44RU)
(195.43 x 50.04 x 108.57 cm)
6.3.1.1 Chassis Diagrams
This section provides extreme chassis dimensions that you can use for rack
configuration planning.
• 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions

− Figure 51
− Table 42
• 7950 XRS-20e AC Chassis Dimensions
− Figure 52
− Table 43
• 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
− Figure 53
− Table 44
• 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions
− Figure 54
− Table 45
• 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
− Figure 55
− Table 46

Installation Guide
Figure 51 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions
A
G
B A C
A
hw0190

Installation Guide
Table 42 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions
Key Description
A Zero-point index from which all measurement are taken.

B 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)
C 29.57 in. (75.11 cm); impeller fan-bay door
D 7.83 (19.88 cm); bottom-front cable guide
E 34.03 (86.44 cm); PCMs
F N/A
G 24.40 in. (61.9 cm)
Overall dimensions:
• Height (B) = 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)

• Depth (D+E) = 41.86 in. (106.31 cm)

Installation Guide
Figure 52 7950 XRS-20e AC Chassis Dimensions
A
G
B A C
A
hw0189

Installation Guide
Table 43 7950 XRS-20e AC Chassis Dimensions
Key Description

B 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)
E N/A
F N/A
G 24.40 in. (61.9 cm)
Overall dimensions:
• Height (B) = 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)

• Depth (C+D) = 37.40 in. (94.99 cm)

Installation Guide
Figure 53 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
A
G
B A C
A
hw0191

Installation Guide
Table 44 7950 XRS-20e Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
Key Description

B 76.94 in. (195.44 cm)
D 8.69 in. (22.08 cm); front protection panel
E 30.54 in. (77.57 cm); rear protection panel
F 34.03 in. (86.44 cm); PCMs
G 24.40 in. (61.9 cm)
Overall dimensions:
• Height (B) = 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)

• Depth (D+F) = 42.72 in. (108.52 cm)

Installation Guide
Figure 54 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions
A
G
B A C
A
hw0188

Installation Guide
Table 45 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions
Key Description

B 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)
E 33.43 in. (84.91 cm); bottom-rear cable guide
F 34.03 in.(86.44 cm); PCMs
G 24.40 in. (61.9 cm)
Overall dimensions:
• Height (B) = 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)

• Depth (D+F) = 41.86 in. (106.31 cm)

Installation Guide
Figure 55 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
A
G
B A C
A
hw0192

Installation Guide
Table 46 7950 XRS-40 Universal Chassis Dimensions with Panels
Key Description

B 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)
D 8.69 in. (22.08 cm); front protection panel
E 34.05 in. (86.49 cm); rear protection panel
F 34.03 in. (86.44 cm); PCMs
G 24.40 in. (61.9 cm)
Overall dimensions:
• Height (B) = 76.94 in. (195.43 cm)

• Depth (D+E) = 42.74 in. (108.57 cm)

Installation Guide
6.3.2 Rack Clearance Requirements
Table 47 Minimum Chassis Clearance Guidelines
Location Minimum Rack Clearance Requirements
Sides None
Front Maintenance and air flow: 26 in. (66 cm) as measured from the
lower front cable guide; see index point D in section 6.3.1.1.
Rear Maintenance: 34.5 in. (87.63 cm) as measured from the top rear
chassis post; see index point C in section 6.3.1.1
Air flow: 12 in. (30.5 cm)
6.3.2.1 Cabinet Clearance Requirements
When installing the chassis in a cabinet, maintain a minimum depth clearance of

48 in. (121.9 cm). This is to avoid damage to CXP cages on SFM cards caused by
cabinet door latch assemblies and other related hardware.
6.3.3 Required tools

• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• anti-static bags, mats, and packaging
• ESD wrist strap

Installation Guide
6.4 Safety Considerations

• Placement, section 6.4.1
• Grounding, section 6.4.2
• Cabling, section 6.4.3
• Power, section 6.4.4
• Impeller Fan Trays, section 6.4.5
• Air Filters, section 6.4.6
• Storage, section 6.4.7
6.4.1 Placement
Warning:
• Install the chassis in standard-sized equipment racks. The chassis ships with integral
rack-mounting points for a 19-inch four-post rack.
• Install the chassis in a clean, dry, ventilated, and temperature-controlled room.
• Verify that the rack is properly bolted and braced and grounded to a grounding
electrode.
• Install the chassis into the equipment rack before installing components.

Installation Guide
6.4.2 Grounding
Warning:
• The router and equipment rack must be properly grounded.

• Chassis ground cables are not included. Main grounding (earthing) connection points
are through grounding points on the sides of the chassis. Lack of proper grounding
(earthing) of the equipment may result in a safety hazard and excessive
electromagnetic emissions.
• The grounding of the chassis recommended in the installation manual and the parts
provided in the accessories kit is based on CSA and NEBS guidelines. Alternate ground
connections may also be applicable. Ultimately, the grounding of the chassis shall
comply with all local codes and ordinances where the system is installed.
• The ground conductor must, at a minimum, match the cable size used for the input DC
power. If you use 4 AWG or larger for each DC power input/return, then use a 4 AWG
or larger cable size for ground connections.
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if components are mishandled.
• Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap in contact with bare skin. Always
connect the ESD strap (with banana plug) to the ESD connection socket (grounding
jack) on the front of the chassis.
6.4.3 Cabling
Warning:
• To comply with the GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6, requirement R4-9 [31] standard for
electromagnetic compatibility and safety, all intra-building ports are specified for use
with shielded and grounded cables at both ends.
• The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or sub-assembly is suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or sub-assembly must not be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring or to equipment in an Isolated Bonding
Network (IBN) unless the wiring passes through an SPCW as defined in GR-295. These
interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports
as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 6) and require isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection to connect these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring. For equipment installed in an IBN, use Mesh-BN,
Mesh-IBN, or Chain-IBN. Equipment rearrangements shall maintain the existing
bonding topology.
• Bare conductors must be coated with an appropriate antioxidant compound before
crimp connections are made. All unplated connectors, braided strap, and bus bars must
be brought to a bright finish and then coated with an antioxidant before they are
connected.
• 7950 XRS-20e is designed for DC-I power configurations. The battery returns must
remain isolated until they reach the main power bus.

Installation Guide
6.4.4 Power
Warning:
• Only service electrical personnel should perform wiring and cabling to the system.
• All power to the equipment rack or cabinet should be disconnected before the
installation.
• The power cable(s) must be copper and meet your local electric code requirements.
• The circuit breaker is not intended to be used as the chassis ON/OFF switch.
Disconnect the power from the power source to remove power.
• The router should be installed only in restricted access area (such as dedicated
equipment room and electrical closet).
6.4.5 Impeller Fan Trays

The cooling system must have at least 26 in. (66.04 cm) in front of the chassis and
34 in. (86.36 cm) behind the chassis for installation, air flow, and maintenance
access.
Three fan trays must be installed before you supply power to the chassis.
Note: If you install the router in a cabinet or other enclosure, ensure that air intake and
exhaust flows are not restricted.

Installation Guide
6.4.6 Air Filters

The air filters must always be installed while the system is powered up. They should
be inspected monthly and the filter elements replaced when indications of
accumulated dust are present.
6.4.7 Storage
To store unused components and extra field-replaceable parts, re-wrap the
components in the original packaging and keep them in a dry, dust-free temperature
controlled environment.
Table 48 Storage Specifications
Storage temperature From –40 to 158°F (–40 to 70°C)

Non-condensing relative humidity 5 to 95%

Installation Guide
6.5 Installation Locations
Warning: Follow the equipment rack manufacturer’s instructions for proper rack installation.
Failure to comply with the requirements and the location requirements outlined in this
section and in Cabinet Clearance Requirements, section 6.3.2.1 may impede proper airflow
and may result in the system overheating.
The 7950 XRS-20e is intended to be installed in facilities that provide weather

protection and an extended temperature-controlled environment.
The 7950 XRS-20e is not intended for installation outdoors.
The 7950 XRS-20e is designed to work in an environment equivalent to a modern

office building, where protection is provided from contaminants including mold
growth, precipitation, volatile or corrosive chemicals, hygroscopic dust, insects,
pests, or vermin entering the product.
The product must be protected from ingress of contaminants such as outside air,
conductive pollution, volatile or corrosive elements (for example, salt-laden air),
hygroscopic dust, insects, pests, or vermin.
The humidity levels in the cabinet must be controlled to ensure a relative humidity
level between 5% and 85% (non-condensing) with short-term levels of 5% to 95%
(non-condensing). (Short-term is a period of less than 96 consecutive hours and a
total of no more than 15 days per year. This is equivalent to 360 hours per year, with
short-term periods occurring no more than 15 times per year.) The dew point
threshold in the cabinet must not be crossed.
The ambient air temperature must be within the specifications defined in section 5.3.
For seismic applications, the rack must be NEBS Seismic Zone 4 rated.
The rail mounting holes in the equipment rack must align with the mounting holes on
the chassis mounting brackets. The 7950 XRS-20e mounting brackets are factory-
installed for a NEBS mount in a 19-inch rack. Required tools and hardware:
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Anti-static bags, mats, and packaging
• ESD wrist strap

Installation Guide
6.6 Installation Site Assessment

Before installing equipment at a site, the characteristics of the site should be
considered to determine whether they will adversely affect the reliability of the
equipment. The following section discusses some of the site factors to consider prior
to deploying equipment.
6.6.1 Geographical Location

Different geographical locations carry different risk factors. For example, coastal
installations with prevailing winds from the sea may be affected by Airborne Sea Salt
Particles (ASSP), which can be carried many kilometers inland. As well, installations
near ancient seabeds that have very high levels of salt in the soil may be affected by
ASSP during windy drought conditions. Mountainous regions near coasts cause
unique fog conditions. High humidity environments often cross dew point thresholds
at night.
Consider whether the installation site is in an area that has the potential to
experience any of the following seasonal influences: hurricanes, cyclones, tidal or
river flooding, recent volcanic activity, or forest fires.
Examine the local surrounding environment of the installation site for proximity to
possible sources of contaminants that may cause or accelerate corrosion, especially
in the presence of high humidity.
Possible sources of contaminants include: landfills, fertilizer manufacturing, farming,

sewage, geothermal activity, swamps or marshes, oceans, ancient seabeds, power
generation, automotive and diesel combustion, fossil fuel processing, cement plants,
construction sites, steel blast furnaces, steel electric furnaces, coke plants, pulp
manufacturing, chlorine plants, rubber manufacturing, paint manufacturing,
aluminum manufacturing, ore smelting, tobacco smoke, and battery manufacturing.
If there is any uncertainty surrounding the concentration of various contaminants at

the installation site, then Corrosion Classification Coupons may be used to classify
the severity of the environment according to the standard ISA 71.04

Installation Guide
6.6.2 Installation Site Type

The site must provide the appropriate environment for the installed equipment. This
usually involves controlling ingress of contaminants and ensuring that humidity
remains as low as possible.
Installations are typically in a hut, parking garage, room, or cabinet. Installation in

data centers or telecom centers do not usually have high pollution levels but could
still have high humidity levels.
6.6.2.1 Room
Is the room connected to the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system
of the building? What protection is there to prevent ingress of dust, pollution, and
humidity? To seal the environment properly, ensure that any doors, windows, vents,
holes, or conduits are sealed or gasketed appropriately to ensure that the HVAC
system can control the environment. These must be checked as part of routine site
maintenance.
If outside air is brought in for ventilation, does it pass through a filter? What is the
type and rating of the filter? Filters can help but the type of filter must be appropriate
for the pollutants you are trying to exclude. For example, a standard fiberglass type
air filter only prevents large debris and dirt from entering, but will do nothing to
prevent entry of small particles (such as ASSP), humid air or gaseous contaminants.
It is important to understand the local conditions and consider what type of filtering is
most appropriate. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) charts may serve as
a good source to understand particle sizes and filter options
One simple yet effective way to keep pollutants out is to ensure that positive pressure
is maintained inside the room or cabinet as compared to the outside by having fans
blowing properly filtered air into the room.
Does the site have an air conditioner or dehumidifier? Is the rating and capacity
adequate for the space? Where does the dehumidifier or air conditioner water
drainage go?
Humidity reduction is one of the key elements in corrosion control. Air conditioners
and dehumidifiers are recommended to reduce local relative humidity at the site.
Another method is to keep the temperature in the cabinet high enough to maintain
the relative humidity at less than 50%. Condensate, if allowed to stay in the site or
enclosure, will evaporate over time and lead to higher relative humidity and
corrosion.

Installation Guide
6.6.2.2 Cabinet
There are 3 major classifications of cabinets.
• Direct Air Cooled (DAC) cabinets bring air into the cabinet to cool the
equipment. DAC cabinets may or may not be filtered. Unfiltered air intake and
exhaust is not recommended since issues will occur if unfiltered air is allowed
into the cabinet. The ideal filter is a hydrophobic filter (GORE) since it filters
particles smaller than 1 micron. Hydrophobic filters will prevent passage of
water droplets but still allow water vapor to pass. Some chemical pollutants
may require carbon or other types of filters particularly suited to the type of
pollution.
• Heat Exchange (HEX) cabinets use a sealed cabinet and a heat exchanger
to withdraw heat from the cabinet interior without bringing outside air into the
cabinet. This results in no contamination influx and low humidity within the
cabinet.
• Air Conditioned (AC) cabinets use a mechanical or Thermal Electric Cooling
(TEC) refrigeration unit to handle higher levels of heat in high-power
installations. AC implementation is similar to HEX since the cabinet should be
sealed. Proper AC implementation should never allow unfiltered air into the
cabinet interior.

Installation Guide
6.6.3 Site Influences

Is backup power generation located in the same area as the communications
equipment? Are batteries located in the same area as the equipment?
Backup generators that are located in the same enclosed area as the
communications equipment may cause a great deal of site pollution, such as nitrous
oxides and hydrogen sulphides, which can be detrimental to the long-term reliability
and performance of equipment. A best practice is to house motor generator sets in
a separate enclosure from the communications equipment. Batteries will out-gas
during charge and discharge cycles. These gases are very corrosive and may also
be explosive in sufficient concentration. Batteries should always be housed in a
properly vented enclosure or compartment, separate from the communications
equipment.
Is the equipment located above the water grade? Is there adequate water drainage
and leak controls?
Many areas are prone to flooding during rainy season or spring thaws, and it is
important for the site to be located above typically anticipated flood levels, or to have
sump pumps to keep the installation site dry. Drainage with a back flow preventer
should be installed if the site has provision for water sources, such as cooling towers.
What protection is there to prevent entry of insects, pests, and vermin?
Pests and vermin such as insects, mice, and spiders prefer warm, sheltered areas.
All entries into the enclosure or shelter should be appropriately sealed and regularly
maintained.
6.6.4 Site Assessment Checklists

The following site assessment checklists are intended to act as a tool in assessing
the potential risks that must be managed at an installation site. The checklists are not
intended to provide an exhaustive list of all risk factors, but rather to indicate some
of the most common risks.
The first two checklists indicate environmental factors that may result in
malfunctioning or failing equipment if the installation site is not appropriately
deployed and maintained to counteract the detrimental effects of the environment.
For each risk factor that is present, you must consider how to best design the
installation site to avoid the negative effects of the risk factor. For the final checklist,
any question that is answered in the negative indicates that measures must be taken
to correct the installation site appropriately to reduce the risk of equipment damage.

Installation Guide
6.6.4.1 Seasonal Influences
Is the installation site in an area with the potential to experience any of these
seasonal influences?
Table 49 Seasonal Influences

Influence Yes No
Hurricanes
Cyclones
Tidal or river flooding
Recent volcanic activity
Forest fires
6.6.4.2 Local Risk Factors
Is the local surrounding environment of the installation site in proximity to possible

sources of contaminants or other risk factors that may cause or accelerate
corrosion?
Table 50 Local Risk Factors

Risk Factor Yes No
Landfills
Fertilizer manufacturing
Farming
Sewage
Geothermal activity
Swamps or marshes
Oceans
Ancient seabeds
Power generation
Automotive and diesel combustion
Fossil fuel processing
Cement plants
Construction sites

Installation Guide
Table 50 Local Risk Factors (Continued)

Risk Factor Yes No
Steel blast furnaces
Steel electric furnaces
Coke plants
Pulp and paper manufacturing
Chlorine plants
Rubber manufacturing
Paint manufacturing
Aluminum manufacturing
Ore smelting
Tobacco smoke
Battery manufacturing
Mountains near a coastline
High humidity regions
Fossil fuel use, such as open fires used by locals for cooking or
burning farming byproducts

Installation Guide
6.6.4.3 Specific Characteristics of the Installation Site
Does the installation site exhibit characteristics that may require upgrade or repair?
Table 51 Specific Characteristics of the Installation Site

Characteristic Yes No
Is the installation site in a room that is part of the building HVAC
system?
Does the installation site have protection to prevent ingress of dust?
Does the installation site have protection to prevent ingress of
pollution?
Does the installation site have protection to prevent ingress of
humidity?
If outside air is brought in for ventilation, does it pass through a filter?
If outside air is brought in for ventilation through a filter, is the type and
rating of the filter appropriate to the environmental conditions?
Does the site have an air conditioner?
Is the rating and capacity adequate for the space?
Is there proper drainage of water from the air conditioner?
Does the site have a dehumidifier?
Is the rating and capacity adequate for the space?
Is there proper drainage of water from the dehumidifier?
Is backup power generation located in a separate area from the
communications equipment?
Are batteries located in a separate area from the communications
equipment?
Is the equipment located above the water grade?
Are there adequate water drainage and leak controls?
Is there protection present to prevent entry of insects, pests, and
vermin?

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installing and Grounding the Chassis
Installation Guide
7 Installing and Grounding the Chassis

• Warnings and Notes, section 7.1
• Unloading the Chassis, section 7.2
• Installing CCMs, section 7.3
• Rack Mounting the Chassis, section 7.4
• Making the Chassis Ground Connection, section 7.5
• Attaching PIM Slot ID Brackets, section 7.6
• Installing PCM Fans, section 7.7
• Completing the Installation, section 7.8

Review this section to avoid personal injury or damage to the system.
Danger: Risk of Personal Injury. Hearing Protection Required.
Caution: Risk of Personal Injury. The combined weight of the chassis and the shipping
crate is 530 lb (240 kg). Do not attempt to lift or move the shipping crate without the use of
a pallet jack or forklift.

Installing and Grounding the Chassis 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note:
• The system should only be installed in a restricted access area, such as a dedicated
equipment room or equipment closet in accordance with Articles 110-26 and 110-27 of
the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, or in accordance with the applicable code
in the country of installation.
• Because an 7950 XRS-40 system is comprised of two 7950 XRS-20e chassis placed
next to each other, you can extend the information in the chapter to a second
7950 XRS-20e chassis for a single 7950 XRS-40 system.
• Router components such as cards, APEQs, and spares are shipped separately.
• The chassis is packaged and protected by anti-static packaging. Do not discard the
crate and materials used in shipping. The packing materials should be re-used if it is
necessary to reship the router.
• Move the shipping crate to a space large enough to accommodate the shipping crate
with the ramp in the open and down position, and the chassis; approximately 14 ft
(4.27 m).
• Keep the chassis wrapped in the anti-static packaging until you are ready to install the
router.

Installation Guide
7.2 Unloading the Chassis

Use the following illustrations to guide your decisions regarding the safe unloading
of the chassis.
Figure 56 Shipping Crate Dimensions
A
B
C D
hw0085
Table 52 Shipping Crate Dimensions
Key Description
A Overall height: 94.25 in. (239.40 cm)

B Ramp length: 87.5 in. (225.25 cm)
C Width: 40.5 in. (102.87 cm)
D Depth: 45 in. (114.30 cm)

Installation Guide
Figure 57 Shipping Crate Latch
hw0086

Installation Guide
Figure 58 Lifting Ramp
hw0087
Figure 59 Securing Ramp
hw0088

Installation Guide
Figure 60 Ramp in Open Position
hw0089

Installation Guide
Figure 61 Removing Keeper
hw0090
Figure 62 Removing Chassis
hw0091

Installation Guide
Figure 63 Unloaded Chassis
hw0092
Warning: Risk of Personal Injury: The combined weight of the chassis and the shipping
crate is 530 lb (240 kg). To reduce the risk of injury, use two persons to unload the chassis
from the crate.
Step 1. Use a pallet jack to position the crate on level ground in a space large
enough to accommodate the shipping crate with the ramp in the open and
down position, and the chassis; approximately 14 ft (4.26 m), see Figure 63.
Step 2. Unfasten the four latches holding the ramp in place; see Figure 57.
Step 3. Use the ramp mid-span support to lift the ramp up and out of the lower
footing; see Figure 58.
Step 4. Lower the ramp to the floor.

Installation Guide
Step 5. Remove the accessory kit located under the chassis dolly.
Step 6. Lift the foot of the ramp and position it into footer; see Figure 59.
This task is made easier with two people; one on each side.
Step 7. Pull to remove the foam padding strip from the ramp; see Figure 60.
Step 8. Remove the keeper on the lower side fenders; see Figure 61.
Step 9. Unlock the casters on the chassis dolly.
Step 10.Grab the mounting bracket flanges (under the anti-static bag) on both sides
to roll the chassis out of the crate and down the ramp; see Figure 62.
Step 11.Remove the anti-static bag and cardboard cover from the chassis when you
are ready to install the chassis into the rack.
Step 12.For instructions on how to rack mount the chassis, see section 7.4.
Caution: Do not attempt to lift the chassis with a mechanical lift after it has been removed
from the dolly. The chassis dolly must remain bolted to the chassis until it is positioned in
front of the rack or cabinet for installation.
7.3 Installing CCMs

Install two CCMs using the following procedure:
Step 1. Unpack the new CCM.

Step 2. Insert the guide pins in place and push the CCM into place until it is fully
seated.
Step 3. Tighten the captive screws to a torque of 32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).

Installation Guide
7.4 Rack Mounting the Chassis
Danger: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace this chassis and
chassis components
Caution:
• Do not load the chassis with any cards or components prior to rack mounting the
chassis.
• Do not attempt to lift the chassis with a mechanical lift after it has been removed from
the dolly.
• The chassis dolly must remain bolted to the chassis until it is properly rack mounted.
• When rack mounting the chassis in an equipment rack, do not stack any other
equipment directly on top of the chassis. The top must be free of obstructions to allow
the exhaust air to exit the chassis.
Note: Because the cross-connect SFM cables for an 7950 XRS-40 system are 32.81 ft
(10 m), plan to rack mount the second 7950 XRS-20e chassis of an 7950 XRS-40 system
as close as possible to the first chassis.
The overall height requirements are 44RU (rack units; including 5 in. (12.7 cm) of
ground clearance:
The front rack mounting fixtures are an integral part of the chassis and are not
removable. Use them to mount the chassis in a four-post rack. A cabinet design for
23 in. (58.42 cm) wide equipment is recommended to ensure ample room for routing
power and signal cables. Contact your cabinet supplier for adapting the 19-inch
(48.26 cm) chassis to the 23-inch (58.42 cm) format.
Before you begin, verify:
• The equipment rack is securely installed, anchored, and grounded.

• At least one rack shelf is available; see section 7.4.1.
• Any power to the rack is OFF.

Installation Guide
7.4.1 Installing the Chassis

There are two variants of 7950 XRS-20e chassis. The differences between the two
variants are related to power options and do not impact system performance.
The 7950 XRS-20e chassis has cable tie-down bars that are found only on the front
side of the chassis.
The chassis is shipped bolted to a dolly. Use the chassis dolly to roll the router to the
rack for installation in the rack.
Caution: Do not attempt to lift the unsupported chassis with a mechanical lift.
Step 1. Using the chassis dolly, roll the chassis near the rack.
Step 2. Install a shelf (not supplied) in the rack so that the top of the shelf aligns with
the bottom of the first rack-mount position in the bottom of the cabinet. This
will allow the chassis to utilize the entire 44RU for proper ventilation.
Note: The shelf should be rated for at least 600 lb (272 kg).
Step 3. If the front/rear cabinet corner posts are not tapped for direct installation of
the mounting screws, nut-plates must be installed at this point. Identify the
positions on the rail holes that correspond with the chassis mounting hole
positions and insert the nut-plates.
Step 4. Use a screwdriver to remove the APEQ access panel and set aside.
Step 5. Roll the chassis into position in front of the rack; see Figure 64.

Installation Guide
Figure 64 Positioning Chassis to Rack

C
B hw0048
Table 53 Chassis and Rack
Key Description
A Chassis
B Chassis dolly
C Equipment rack
D Equipment shelf (not supplied) rated for at least 1500 lb (681 kg)

Installation Guide
Step 6. Unbolt the chassis from the chassis dolly.

The chassis is secured to the dolly with four bolts (two front and two rear),
which are screwed into the chassis from underneath the dolly.
Step 7. With one person in front of the rack and one behind the rack, push the
chassis from the chassis dolly onto the shelf and position it in the rack; see
Figure 65.
Figure 65 Pushing Chassis into Rack
hw0049

Installation Guide
Step 8. Align the mounting holes on each front bracket to the rack rail. Insert a
screw into each hole in the front mounting bracket and tighten to the
recommended torque for the fastener size used; see Figure 66. Utilize all
mounting holes at the front of the chassis.
Step 9. Install the eight rear rack mounting brackets, four on each side; see
Figure 66.
Figure 66 Securing Chassis in Rack
B
D
A C
hw0050

Installation Guide
Table 54 Brackets and Screws
Key Description
A Front mounting screws (not supplied)

B Rear rack mounting brackets
C Rear rack mounting brackets screws
D Rear rack mounting screws (not supplied)
7.5 Making the Chassis Ground Connection

The chassis must be properly grounded for all applications. Nokia supports both CBN
(common ground) and IBN (isolated ground) implementations for the chassis.
Choose the size of the grounding cables and lugs according to the Agency/Country
requirements for your location. The CSA safety certification requires that the ground
cables and lugs used should at the minimum match the size of the cables and lugs
used for power termination (4 AWG or larger, or as required by local code).
Note: The grounding method for the system that this document describes is based on CSA
and NEBS guidelines. Alternate ground connections may also be applicable. Ultimately, the
grounding of the chassis shall comply with all local codes and ordinances where the system
is installed.
Nokia recommends that you prepare your ground cable with a standard barrel, 2-hole
lug with two 0.25 in. (0.64 cm) diameter holes on a 0.75 in. (1.9 cm) spacing.
Note: The chassis grounding lugs are larger than the lugs used to connect system power
and return.
Grounding cables are not provided with the chassis. To make sure that the
equipment is connected to earth ground, follow the instructions to prepare the ground
wire. The length of the grounding wire depends on the location of the router and
proximity to the proper grounding facilities.
The chassis has two bare-metal grounding pads each with a pair of threaded (1/4-20
UNC) holes. There are two grounding pads located on the top rear sides of the
chassis.

Installation Guide
7.5.1 Attaching the Fan Bay Door Ground Strap

Figure 67 Fan Bay Door Ground Strap
A A
B A
B C C hw0071
Table 55 Fan Bay Door Ground Strap Features
Key Description
A Chassis-end grounding point

B Ground lug
C Screws (6-32 x ¼) with integral lock washer
Step 1. Locate the fan bay ground strap in the accessory kit.
Step 2. Use the supplied screws to attached ground strap as shown in Figure 67.
Torque the screws to 10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m)

Installation Guide
7.5.2 Preparing the Chassis Ground Wire

The ground conductor must be 4 AWG or larger. If input cables are larger than
4 AWG, use an equivalent size ground cable. The ground conductor must, at a
minimum, match the cable size used for the input DC power.
Figure 68 Prepare the Ground Wire

B
hw0094
Table 56 Ground Wire Descriptions
Key Description
A Copper wire
B Insulation stripped the length specified by the lug manufacturer
Step 1. Using a wire-stripping tool, strip the insulation from the wire to 0.44 in.
(1.11 cm).
Step 2. As required by local codes, apply an antioxidant to the exposed wire before
crimping it to the ground lug.
Step 3. Slide the open end of the ground lug over the exposed area of the prepared
wire.
Step 4. Use the lug manufacturers recommended crimping tool to crimp the ground
lug to the wire.
7.5.3 Making the Chassis Ground Wire Connection
Note: When wiring any Nokia 7950 router, the ground connection must always be made first
and disconnected last.
The chassis grounding pads are located on the top rear left and right sides of the
chassis. Install the grounding lug, as shown in Figure 69.

Installation Guide
The chassis grounding pad may have three holes. Only two holes are required to
make a proper ground connection. Chassis with three-hole grounding pads provide
more flexibility for use of lugs with different hole spacings.
Figure 69 Connect the Grounding Lug on the Chassis
A B C A A
hw0083
Table 57 Chassis Ground Features
Key Description
A Grounding pads (two-hole version shown)

B Ground lug (not supplied)
C Two 1/4-20 x 5/8 in. screws with integral lock washer
D The ground conductor must be 4 AWG or larger. If input cables are
larger than 4 AWG, use an equivalent size ground cable (not supplied).
Step 1. Bring your grounding surfaces to a bright finish, and if required by local
codes, coat them with an antioxidant before attaching the lug to the chassis.
Step 2. Install the lug using the locking screw. Torque the screws to 56 lbf·in
(6.33 N·m).
Step 3. Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to the appropriate
grounding point at your site to ensure adequate chassis ground according
to local safety codes. The screws are not supplied.

Installation Guide
7.6 Attaching PIM Slot ID Brackets
Note: The PIM ID slot brackets are only required for the Universal chassis.
The PIM ID slot brackets are included in the accessory kit.
Figure 70 Attaching PIM Slot ID Brackets
2
1 1
3
2 2
4 3 3
4 4
5
5 5
6 6
6
7 7
7 8 8
9 9
8
10 10
9 11 11
12 12
10
11
12
hw0162
Step 1. Attach the brackets to the chassis rails adjacent to the PCP.
Step 2. Secure the brackets to the chassis with the captives screws.

Installation Guide
7.7 Installing PCM Fans
Note: PCM fans are required only if you are going to install Quad PCMs.
The PCM fan bay below the PCP supports two PCM fans for redundancy. You must
install PCM fans if you are using Quad PCMs; see section 3.2.2.2. The cooling fins
in the front of the Quad PCM require the use of PCM fans. As PCMs are installed into
the chassis from the bottom upward, a cooling channel is created. With Quad PCMs,
the PCM fans draw air down through this air channel and exhaust hot air into the
APEQ exhaust channel.
Figure 71 Installing PCM Fans
hw0281
Step 1. Remove the PCM fan bay screen.

Step 2. Insert PCM fans in fan bay.
Step 3. Push in to seat the connector with the receptacle in the rear of the slot.
Step 4. Secure the PCM fan in place by tightening the captive screw (push in and
turn clockwise). Torque to 10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).

Installation Guide
7.8 Completing the Installation

The following system components ship in separate containers and must be installed
before you power on the system.
• APEQs depending on configuration (5 minimum); see section 8.3.1

• PIMs
• PCMs
• PCM fans (only when Quad PCMs/4275W APEQs are used)
• CPMs (2 required); see section 9.1
• SFMs (7 +1); see section 9.2
• XCMs (based on order); see section 10.4
• Mechanical adapters: two each per XCM; where C-XMAs are installed
• C-XMAs/XMAs (based on order); see section 10.5
• Impedance panels (based on order)’ see Figure 29
• front cable guides (upper and lower)
accumulation, to help control airflow and electromagnetic interference, and for safety
reasons.
Each chassis variant is shipped with an accessory kit exclusively associated to each
chassis variant.
• Universal chassis; Table 58

• AC/HVDC chassis; Table 59
Table 58 Universal Accessory Kit
Qty Description
2 Console Cable, DB-9 to RJ-45

40 Screw, 1/4-20 X 3/8
2 Screw, 6-32 X 1/4
8 Rear, rack mount bracket
1 Air filter, XCM center vent
1 Air filter frame, XCM center vent

Installation Guide
Table 58 Universal Accessory Kit (Continued)
Qty Description
2 Bracket, PIM ID
1 Wrist strap
Table 59 AC/HVDC Accessory Kit
Qty Description
2 Console Cable, DB-9 to RJ-45

40 Screw, 1/4-20 X 3/8
2 Screw, 6-32 X 1/4
8 Rear, rack mount bracket
1 Air filter, XCM center vent
1 Air filter frame, XCM center vent
1 Wrist strap
7.8.1 Component Operating Requirements
Table 60 Component Operating Requirements Summary
Component Minimum Maximum Field

(7950 XRS-40) Replaceable
Impeller fan trays 3 3 (6) Yes

CCM 1 2 (4) Yes
CPM 1 2 (4) Yes
SFM 1 8 (16) Yes
XCM (per chassis) 0 10 (20) Yes
XMAs (per XCM) 0 2 Yes
C-XMAs (per XCM) 0 2 Yes

Installation Guide
Table 60 Component Operating Requirements Summary (Continued)
Component Minimum Maximum Field

(7950 XRS-40) Replaceable
APEQ 5 12 (24) Yes

PIM 5 12 (24) Yes
PCM 5 12 (24) Yes
PCM fans 01 2 (4) Yes
Impeller fan trays 3 3 (6) Yes

Air filters
CCM 1 1 (2) Yes
XCM 1 1 (2) Yes
Main system 1 1 (2) Yes
APEQ 1 1 (2) Yes
1. Only required when Quad PCMs/4275W APEQs are used

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installing APEQs and Connecting Power
Installation Guide
8 Installing APEQs and Connecting Power

• General Power Warnings and Notes, section 8.1
• APEQ Slot Numbers, section 8.2
• Installing DC APEQs for Universal Chassis, section 8.3
• Installing HVDC APEQs, section 8.4
• Connecting HVDC Power, section 8.5
• Installing AC APEQs, section 8.6
• Connecting AC Power, section 8.7
Note: Because an 7950 XRS-40 system is comprised of two 7950 XRS-20e chassis
placed next to each other, you can extend the information in this chapter to a second
7950 XRS-20e chassis for a single 7950 XRS-40 system.
8.1 General Power Warnings and Notes
Danger:
• Only qualified personnel should connect power cables.

• Before working on equipment that is connected to power, remove jewelry, (rings,
necklaces, watches, etc.). When metal objects are in contact with power and ground,
serious burns can occur or the object can be welded to the device.
• Turn off power at the power source before you install or remove power cords.
• You must use cables which meet local electrical code requirements.
• Make your ground connections first.
• Hearing Protection Required.
Warning:

• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle components. Always
wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD strap to the
grounding plug on the front of the chassis.

Installing APEQs and Connecting Power 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note:
• To provision the APEQs that need to be deployed in the router; see section 4.3.
• This chapter provides you with APEQ installation instructions. Remove and replace
instructions are provided in section 16.6.
• In the event of an APEQ failure, the APEQ must be replaced. There are no field
serviceable parts inside the power equalizers.
8.2 APEQ Slot Numbers

Up to 12 APEQs can be installed in the chassis. Figure 72 shows the APEQ slot-
numbering scheme.
Warning: APEQs must be installed in sequence starting with slot 12.
Figure 72 APEQ Slot Numbers
APEQ 1 APEQ 2 APEQ 3 APEQ 4

XRS20_52

Installation Guide
8.3 Installing DC APEQs for Universal Chassis

For deployment of the Universal chassis variant, you must install a corresponding
number of APEQ-DC-2200/2800 or APEQ-DC-4275 modules and PIM/PCMs.
• Installing 4275W APEQ, section 8.3.1

• Connecting DC Power, section 8.3.2
Warning:
• Do not apply power to feeds A or B until all components are installed.

• APEQs must be installed in sequence starting with slot 12; see section 8.3.1.
• Corresponding PIMs and PCMs must be installed in sequence starting with PCP
slot 12; see section 8.3.2.
8.3.1 Installing 4275W APEQ

Figure 73 Installing 4275W APEQ
hw0116

Installation Guide
Table 61 4275W APEQ Features
Key Description
A Captive screw (one per APEQ)

B Extraction handle
C Extraction handle fully opened when inserting or removing the
APEQ
Step 1. Put on an ESD-preventive wrist strap and attach it to the chassis.

Step 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the APEQ
access panel; see Figure 131.
Step 3. Identify the slots to be populated.
NOTE: The first APEQ should be installed in slot 12. This corresponds to
the correct load-order for each PIM/PCM assembly (PCP slots 1 - 12); see
section 8.3.2.3.
Step 4. Remove the plastic filler panel; see Figure 72
Step 5. Remove the APEQ from the packaging.
Step 6. Align the APEQ with the appropriate power slot.
Step 7. Loosen the captive screw on the APEQ ejector and swing fully open.
Step 8. Slide the APEQ into the slot until the connector makes contact with the
receptacle in the rear of the slot.
Step 9. Push the APEQ ejector lever to the closed position. This seats the
connector with the receptacle in the rear of the slot.
Step 10.Secure the APEQ in place by tightening the captive screw to a torque of
10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).
Step 11.Replace the APEQ access panel.
8.3.2 Connecting DC Power

• DC Power Warnings and Notes, section 8.3.2.1
• Preparing Input Power Wiring, section 8.3.2.2
• PIM Terminal Block Wiring, section 8.3.2.3

Installation Guide
8.3.2.1 DC Power Warnings and Notes
Danger:
• A suitable disconnect device must be provided in the DC branch, either a circuit breaker
or switch that can be employed to disconnect power to the system during servicing.
• Before connecting or disconnecting ground or power wires to the chassis, ensure that
power is removed from the DC circuit.
• On the power input and connection modules, the RTN and –48 VDC feeds are
electrically isolated.
• Confirm that the DC power source is OFF during installation. The power source should
be a safety extra-low voltage (SELV) source.
• The system with APEQs should be installed only in restricted access area (such as
dedicated equipment room and electrical closet) in accordance with Articles 110-26 and
110-27 of the most recent National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
• The DC cable lugs at the input terminals need shrink tubing to cover the DC lug barrels.
• Before you begin connecting power to the chassis:
− Verify that the chassis ground connection is properly made.
− Verify that appropriate circuit breakers are installed (60A or 80A).
− Verify that all 60A or 80A power feeds from the plant distribution panel to the
chassis are powered OFF.
Warning:
• When using 60A/80A or 4275W APEQ modules, you must provision the appropriate
power source and cables depending on the chosen configuration:
• When the APEQ module is provisioned for 80A mode, all the associated power cabling
must to be rated for 80A (based on NEC standard).
Caution:
• If you choose to install a full complement of PIMs prior to inserting PCMs in PIMs, you
MUST insert PCMs in PIMs following a strict sequence from bottom to top.
• Make sure you directly connect the chassis to the DC power supply system earthing
electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from an earthing terminal bar or bus to
which the DC power supply system earthing electrode is connected.
• The DC power supply source must be located within the same premises as this
equipment.
• There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the earthed circuit conductor
between the DC source and the point of connection of the earthing electrode conductor.

Installation Guide
Note:
• The remote power source (circuit breaker panel, outlet, etc.) must be easily accessible.
• Cables are not provided. In the United States, use a 4 AWG or larger copper wire. If the
system is located outside the USA, consult local and national electrical code for proper
wire sizing.
• For the power input and connection modules, lugs are not provided. The lug mounting
studs are 1/4-20 UNC threads on a 0.63 in. (1.59 cm) pitch. Use a copper,
2-hole lug with two 0.25 in. (0.64 mm) diameter holes on a 0.63 in. (1.59 cm) spacing.
• Twelve APEQ slots are located at the bottom front of the chassis (see Figure 5). There
are three rows of four each slots labeled 1 – 12.
• The system requires a minimum of 5 APEQs to operate. Additional APEQs will be
required depending on the power requirements and to maintain the n+1 redundancy.
When multiple APEQs are installed, they share the electrical load equally as long as
they are all operational. If an APEQ fails, the remaining APEQs provides the power the
router requires for normal operation.
8.3.2.2 Preparing Input Power Wiring
Warning:
• Ensure that all power is OFF from the DC circuit. Locate the circuit breaker on the panel
board that services the DC circuit. Switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position.
• When wiring the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last.
• The proper wiring sequence is –48 VDC to –48 VDC and +/return to +/return.
• Consult your local and national electrical codes to calculate the appropriate cable
sizing.
8.3.2.2.1 Preparing the Power Cable
Connect the -48 V and RTN studs on the DC terminal block with power cables
terminated with lugs that meet your local electric codes; see Figure 74.
The other non-terminated end of the power cables must be prepared according to
your local safety codes. The length of the power cable depends on the location of the
router and proximity to the power source.

Installation Guide
Figure 74 Preparing the DC Cable

B
hw0094
Table 62 DC Power Cable
Key Description
A Copper wire
B Insulation stripped the length specified by the lug manufacturer.
Step 1. Using a wire-stripping tool, strip the insulation from the wire to the length
specified by the lug manufacturer.
Step 2. Slide the open end of the lug over the exposed area of the prepared wire.
Step 3. Use the lug manufacturers recommended crimping tool to crimp the lug to
the wire.
Step 4. After dressing cables through channels to the intended PIM, measure 22
inches from the lug hole nearest the cable-end and mark the cable. This is
the first position where you can use a permanent tie-down.
NOTE: This establishes a 22-inch minimum service loop for PIM
replacement.
8.3.2.3 PIM Terminal Block Wiring
The PCP slots are numbered 12 -1; bottom to top. PCP slot 12 provides DC power
to the module in APEQ-slot 12.
For example, to connect 7 APEQs in slots 6 -12, you must connect power to PIMs in
slots 12 through 6.
The DC power cables attach to the power terminal studs on the PIM. There are two
power terminal blocks available for plant wiring; Side A and Side B. Use both A and
B feeds for redundant wiring.
Step 1. Turn off (open) the customer circuit breaker or fuse that protects the cables
to be attached to the PIM.

Installation Guide
Step 3. Remove the PCP slot covers for the PIMs being installed.
NOTE: Slot 12 (bottom) does not ship with a cover in place.
Caution: A continuous cooling air-flow channel is designed into the PCP from Slot 12
upwards. DO NOT leave any slots vacant without slot covers because PCM cooling will be
compromised and they may start to overheat.
Step 4. Insert a PIM in slot 12 (bottom-most slot) and secure it in place using the
captives screws on each side; torque to 32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).
hw0165
NOTE: Connect power lugs to this PIM before installing the next PIM. The
next PIM above this one will block access to the terminal blocks.

Installation Guide
Step 5. Remove the clear-plastic safety covers from the terminal blocks.
Lift up on the center tab to release the cover and then rotate it up and out.
hw0166
Step 6. Identify the –48V and RTN terminals to be wired and remove the nuts from
each of the two studs.
NOTE: Only feed A and feed B are supported by the Dual PCM. All feeds,
including A2 and B2 are supported by the Quad PCM.
Step 7. Check the thickness of the lug to ensure that there is enough clearance for
the lug when the safety cover is in place.
Stud 0.091 IN.

0.100 IN. Ref Nut Top of Nut to End
of Usable Threads
0.090 IN.
Lug Thickness,
Assumed
Completely Flat
Cable Lug hw0509

Installation Guide
Step 8. Using the prepared DC cables, connect the positive/return (+) cables to the
RTN terminals according to local safety codes.
0.624 IN.
0.491 IN.
0.625 IN.
hw0136a
Step 9. Place the nut on each stud and tighten with a torque wrench to 40 lbf·in
(4.52 N·m). Do not over tighten.
Step 10.Connect the negative/power (–) cables to the –48V terminals according to
local safety codes.
Step 11.Place the nut on each stud and tighten with a torque wrench to 40 lbf·in
Step 12.Replace the safety covers.
Caution: You can install a full complement of PIMs prior to inserting PCMs. If you do so,
begin with the PIM in the lowest slot and move up from there.
Step 13.Insert the PCM in the PIM slot and secure in place with the captive screws;
torque to 19 lbf·in (2.15 N·m).

Installation Guide
hw0167
Step 14.Repeat this procedure as required, moving up from the bottom.

Step 15.Turn on (close) the customer circuit breaker or fuse that protects the cables
attached to the PIMs.
Step 16.Check the feed LEDs on the PCMs to verify that power is present: see
section 15.7.

Installation Guide
8.4 Installing HVDC APEQs
Note: HVDC APEQs are supported in both the Universal and the AC/HVDC variants of the
7950 XRS-20e. An HVDC APEQ does not require a power connection at the PCP because
power is terminated directly into the front of the APEQ.
Figure 75 Installing an HVDC APEQ
hw0118
Table 63 HVDC APEQ Features
Key Description

B Extraction handle
APEQ

Installation Guide

Step 3. Remove the APEQ access panel and save for future use.
NOTE: For HVDC deployments, the input power cable is plugged directly to
the front of the APEQ. Therefore, the access panel assembly is not used.
Step 4. Identify the slots to be populated and remove the plastic filler panel; see
Figure 72.
10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).
8.5 Connecting HVDC Power

• HVDC Power Cords, section 8.5.1
• Connecting and Routing HVDC Power Cords, section 8.5.2
8.5.1 HVDC Power Cords

When HVDC APEQ modules are used with the 7950 XRS-20e, the input power cords
are connected directly to the HVDC receptacle on the front of the APEQ. The rear
power input and connection modules are not required.
The HVDC APEQs require a double-ended T-Latch plug power cord; see Figure 76.

Installation Guide
Figure 76 T-Latch HVDC Power Cord Connector
B D
C
hw0119
Table 64 T-Latch HVDC Power Cord Connector Features
Key Description
A Cable latch and wide release button

B Positive terminal
C Negative terminal
D Ground terminal
The cables have the same type of connector on both ends of the cord. One end
connects into the APEQ module; the other end connects to the HVDC power
distribution unit of the central office or data center.
For HVDC APEQ modules, the following power cords can be used:
Table 65 HVDC Power Cords
APEQ Type Power Cord
APEQ-HVDC-3000 3HE11210AA-CBL-HVDC APEQ POWER CBL

APEQ-HVDC-4400 3HE11764AA CBL - HVDC PWR CBL, 400V

Installation Guide
8.5.2 Connecting and Routing HVDC Power Cords
Warning: The chassis does not have an ON/OFF switch. The unit will be powered on if you
plug the power cord into an HVDC power source receptacle.
Follow the recommended HVDC power cord routing plan as shown in Figure 77.
Figure 77 HVDC APEQ Cable Routing
Note: Do not connect the HVDC power cords to the power source until all cords are secure.

Step 2. Position the HVDC power cords in your equipment rack or cabinet so that
the plugs reach the APEQs without severe strain or bends.

Installation Guide
Step 3. Insert an HVDC power cord plug connector into the HVDC receptacle on
each of the installed APEQs.
Verify that the latch locks the plug in the receptacle by pulling on the cord
without engaging the release button on the top of the plug.
A A
hw0127
Step 4. Tie off any unused cords for future use.

Step 5. Connect the HVDC power cords to the HVDC power feeds.
Step 6. After the system has been powered up, check the HVDC APEQ LEDs to
confirm the status of the installed APEQs; see section 15.6.

Installation Guide
8.6 Installing AC APEQs
Note: AC APEQs are supported in both the Universal and the AC/HVDC variants of the
7950 XRS-20e. An AC APEQ does not require a power connection at the PCP because
power is terminated directly into the front of the module.
Figure 78 Installing an AC APEQ
hw0128
Table 66 AC APEQ Features
Key Description

B Extraction handle
APEQ

Installation Guide

Step 3. Remove the APEQ access panel and save for future use.
NOTE: For AC deployments, the input power cable is plugged directly to the
front of the APEQ. Therefore, the access panel assembly is not used.
Step 4. Identify the slots to be populated and remove the plastic filler panel; see
Figure 72.
10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).

Installation Guide
8.7 Connecting AC Power
Warning: The chassis does not have an ON/OFF switch. The unit will be powered on if you
plug the power cord into an AC power source receptacle.
• AC Power Cords, section 8.7.1

• Connecting and Routing AC Power Cords, section 8.7.2
8.7.1 AC Power Cords

When AC APEQ modules are used, the input power cords are directly connected to
the APEQ module in the front. The rear power input and connection modules are not
required.
For AC APEQ modules, the following power cords can be used:
Table 67 AC Power Cords
APEQ Type Power Cord
APEQ-AC-3000 1 3HE00271AH CBL-AC APEQ POWER CBL USA

3HE00271AJ CBL-AC APEQ POWER CBL EUR
APEQ-AC-4400 2 3HE15219AA CBL-APEQ-AC-4400 POWER CBL USA

3HE12562AA CBL-APEQ-AC-4400 POWER CBL EUR
Notes:
1. Use an AC power cord blunt cut with IEC 60320 locking C19 plug; see
Figure 79.
2. Use a pair of AC power cords blunt cut with SAF-D-GRID 300 T Latch plugs;
see Figure 80.

Installation Guide
Figure 79 C19 AC Power Cord Connector
hw0677
Figure 80 T-Latch AC Power Cord Connector
B C hw0676
Table 68 T-Latch AC Power Cord Connector Features
Key Description
A Cable latch and wide release button

B Positive terminal / Neutral
C Negative terminal / Line
D Ground terminal
Use the appropriate cable for your location. For North America, the other end has a
L6-30P Connector that connects to the AC power distribution unit of the central office
or data center.

Installation Guide
8.7.2 Connecting and Routing AC Power Cords

Follow the recommended AC power cord routing plan as shown in Figure 81.
Figure 81 AC APEQ Cable Routing

Step 2. Position the AC power cords within your particular equipment rack or
cabinet so that the plugs reach the APEQs without severe strain or bends.
Step 3. Insert the AC power cord connectors into the installed APEQs.
For T Latch plugs, verify that the lock functions properly by pulling on the
cord without engaging the release button.
A A
hw0127
Step 4. Tie off any unused cords for future use.

Step 5. Connect the AC power cords to the AC power feeds.
Step 6. Check the APEQ LEDs to confirm the status of the installed APEQs;
see section 15.6.

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installing CPMs and SFMs
Installation Guide
9 Installing CPMs and SFMs

• Installing CPMs, section 9.1
• Installing SFMs, section 9.2
Warning:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle CPMs and SFMs.
Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD strap
to the grounding plug on the front or rear of the chassis; see Figure 82.
• Always place router components on an anti-static surface.
• Do not forcefully push on cards to seat them to the mid-plane connectors. This may
cause damage to connectors.
Figure 82 ESD Chassis Grounding Jack
hw0051

Installing CPMs and SFMs 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note:
General:
• CPM modules do not require preconfiguration. Factory default values enable the
system to boot successfully.
• The router requires at least one CPM and its associated CCM.
• Install the CPM before installing any SFM, XCMs, or C-XMAs/XMAs.
• Do not force an SFM into a CPM slot.
• Do not force a CPM into an SFM slot.
7950 XRS:
• The card slots are vertically oriented.

• In the chassis, CPMs must be installed in the rear outer slots labeled A and B.
• SFMs are designed to fit in slots numbered from left to right, 1 through 8.
9.1 Installing CPMs

Install the CPM module before installing SFMs, XCMs, or C-XMAs/XMAs. Install
CPMs only in rear outer slots A or B. When the system is powered up, if both CPMs
are installed, CPM-A assumes the role as active and CPM-B assumes the role as
standby CPM. If for some reason at the time of power up only one CPM is installed,
regardless of the slot A or B, that CPM takes the role as the active and the next CPM
installed in the chassis assumes the role as the standby CPM.

Installation Guide
Note:
• The chassis ships with one rear card cage impedance panel. Use it in place of either a
CPM or SFM when a card is removed for service.
• If you install only one CPM in your router, it becomes the active CPM regardless of the
slot in which it is installed.
• The associated CCM must be installed and operational in order for a CPM to function.
• You do not need to configure the provisioned type of the CPM. SR OS automatically
discovers the CPM type.
• When you remove the active CPM for replacement, or it fails, the standby becomes the
active CPM. If you simultaneously insert two CPMs and they boot up at the same time,
the CPM installed in Slot A becomes the active CPM.
Figure 83 Inserting the CPM into the Chassis
A
B
hw0052
Note: Each CPM module has two ejector levers that seat and release the card from the mid-
plane connectors. During installation, the ejector levers must be positioned outward and
then rotated inward to insert the CPM into the mid-plane.

Installation Guide
Key Description
A Slot guide
B CPM positioned in the slot guide
C CPM captive screw
D Ejector lever

Step 2. Remove the CPM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed circuit board
or connector pins.
Step 3. The CPM must be installed in either outer rear chassis-slot A, or B.
Step 4. Holding the CPM by the edges, insert the CPM halfway into card cage.
Step 5. Rotate the ejector levers outward. The ejector levers must be in this position
to begin insertion.
DO NOT push on faceplate to insert the card.
Step 6. Push on the levers—while maintaining the outward position—until the
levers touch the top and bottom seating surfaces.
Step 7. Rotate the ejector levers inward until vertical to lock the CPM in place. The
CPM faceplate should be flush with the card-cage front face.
Caution: Do not forcefully rotate the ejectors to insert the card until the card has made
partial contact with the mid-plane connectors. Permanent deformation of the ejector tang
may result.
Step 8. Secure the CPM in place by tightening the captive screws to 20 lbf·in
(2.26 N·m).
Step 9. (Optional) Install the redundant CPM in the unused outer rear chassis slot.
Step 10.Attach cables to the card ports as required.

Installation Guide
9.2 Installing SFMs

• Configure SFMs, section 9.2.1
• Minimum Requirements, section 9.2.2
Install (and configure) the SFM module before installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs.
Install SFMs only in rear center slots 1 through 8. The system implements an N+1
redundancy scheme. Seven SFMs are required for full capacity to all ten XCMs, with
the eighth SFM as redundant.When you remove an SFM for replacement or it fails,
the remaining SFMs balance the load.
Note: You must provision the SFM type in order for the card to become operational.
Figure 84 Inserting the SFM into the Chassis
A
B
hw0053

Installation Guide
Table 70 SFM Features
Key Description
A Slot guide
B SFM positioned in the slot guide
C SFM captive screw
D Ejector lever
Note: Each SFM module has two ejector levers that seat and release the card from the mid-
plane connectors. During installation, the ejector levers must be positioned outward and
then rotated inward to insert the SFM into the mid-plane.

Step 2. Remove the SFM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed circuit board
or connector pins.
Step 3. The SFMs must be installed in rear chassis slots 1 through 8.
Step 4. Holding the SFM by the edges, insert the SFM halfway into card cage.
Step 5. Rotate the ejector levers outward. The ejector levers must be in this position
to begin insertion.
Step 6. Push on the levers—while maintaining the outward position—until the
levers touch the top and bottom seating surfaces.
Step 7. Rotate the ejector levers inward until vertical to lock the SFM in place. The
SFM faceplate should be flush with the card-cage front face.
partial contact with the mid-plane connectors. Permanent deformation of the ejector tang
may result.
Step 8. Secure the SFM in place by tightening the captive screws to 20 lbf·in
(2.26 N·m).
Step 9. (Optional) Install the redundant SFM in slot 8.

Installation Guide
9.2.1 Configure SFMs

You must configure the SFM cards in order for them to become operational. If the
configured SFM type does not match the installed type, the SFM will not come into
service.
7950 XRS-20e Sample commands:
configure sfm {1-8} sfm-type sfm-x20-b

configure sfm {1-8} no shutdown
7950 XRS-40 Sample commands:
configure sfm {1-16} sfm-type sfm-x20-b

configure sfm {1-16} no shutdown

Installation Guide
9.2.1.1 Setting Fabric Speed
You must use the fabric-speed-c command option as described in the section to
provision FP4-based cards.
set-fabric-speed
Syntax set-fabric-speed [none | fabric-speed-a | fabric-speed-b | fabric-speed-c]
Context tools perform system
Description You must use the fabric-speed-c command option to provision FP4-based SFMs. It is the
only fabric-speed available for the FP4-based cards and is required for these cards to
function properly.
Default none
Parameters none — Specifies that the fabric speed supports only FP3-based cards. Note: Use this
option to revert back to FP3-based operation.
fabric-speed-a — Specifies that the fabric speed supports FP2 and FP3-based cards.
The 7750 SR-7/12/12e and 7450 ESS-7/12 chassis defaults to the fabric-speed-a
when initially deployed. The chassis operates as: 100 Gb/s per slot for ESS/SR-7/12
and 200 Gb/ s per slot for SR-12e. This permits a mixture of FP2/FP3 based cards
to co-exist.
fabric-speed-b — Specifies that the fabric speed does not support FP2-based cards.
Enables the 7750 SR-7/12 and 7450 ESS-7/12 to operate at up to 200 Gb/s, and the
7750 SR-12e to operate up to 400 Gb/s. All cards in the system are required to be
T3 based (FP3 IMM and/or IOM3-XP-C or newer). The system does not support any
FP2 based cards when the chassis is set to fabric-speed-b. NOTE: For the 7750 SR-
7/12 and 7450 ESS-7/12, the chassis must have a manufacturing date of 2008 or
later (show chassis detail).
fabric-speed-c — Specifies that the fabric speed supports FP3 and FP4-based cards.
Enables the 7950 XRS-20/20e platforms to use both FP3 and FP4 based cards. This
speed is mandatory if FP4 cards are to be used.

Installation Guide
9.2.2 Minimum Requirements

A minimum of one SFM card must be operationally up (configured, installed, not shut
down, and no faults) in a fully working system. The single SFM card can be in any
one of the eight SFM slots.
When a chassis is operating without the minimum required numbers of SFM cards:
• The inactive CPM is operationally down and will not synchronize with the
active CPM; there is no operational CPM redundancy.
• All XCMs are held in a boot state.
• The active CPM is fully operational with ssh/telnet/CLI/SNMP access and will
accept CLI or SNMP requests.
• You can run a show card command, but only limited XCM card information
is available (card type, serial number, and so forth). The show mda command
does not return any information.
If the number of operational SFMs drops below one during system operation (fails,
card removed, or an operation such as clear sfm), the system begins a series of
recovery operations:
• The inactive CPM resets, becomes the back up, but does not synchronize
with the active CPM (not in service as standby)
• The XCMs reset and do not come back into service.
When the minimum required number of SFMs is again operationally up:
• The inactive CPM synchronizes with the active CPM and begins service as
the standby.
• The XCMs switch state to operationally up and attempt to pass traffic on their
C-XMAs/XMAs.
When the system is running with fewer than seven SFMs (but more than the
minimum number to be operationally up) the system continues to operate, but with
reduced throughput and performance. The system gracefully degrades with each
C-XMA/XMA getting reduced bandwidth to and from the switching fabric and using
the advanced QoS features to prioritize the right traffic.

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs
Installation Guide
10 Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs

• Configuring Parameters, section 10.1
• FP4-based Card Licensing, section 10.2
• XCM and C-XMAs/XMA Operational Dependencies, section 10.3
• Installing XCMs, section 10.4
• Installing C-XMAs/XMAs, section 10.5
10.1 Configuring Parameters

After you install the CPM and SFM cards, and configure the SFMs, you can
preconfigure chassis slots, XCM, and C-XMAs/XMAs before you install cards, or
configure them after you install the cards. You must specify each slot and card type.
You cannot configure ports until you have configured the C-XMAs/XMAs.
Preprovision components in the following order:
1. XCMs (card)
2. C-XMAs/XMAs (mda)
3. Ports
10.1.1 Configure Chassis Slot and XCM Parameters

In the config context, use the following CLI commands and syntax examples to
provision the chassis slot and XCM:
CLI Syntax: card slot-number

card-type card-type
Example: ALA-1>config# card 1

ALA-1>config>card# card-type XCM-x20

Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
10.1.1.1 Setting Fabric Speed
You must use the fabric-speed-c command option as described in the section to
provision FP4-based cards.
set-fabric-speed
Syntax set-fabric-speed [none | fabric-speed-a | fabric-speed-b | fabric-speed-c]
Context tools perform system
Description You must use the fabric-speed-c command option to provision FP4-based XCMs. It is the
only fabric-speed available for the FP4-based cards and is required for these cards to
function properly.
Default none
Parameters none — Specifies that the fabric speed supports only FP3-based cards. Note: Use this
option to revert back to FP3-based operation.
fabric-speed-a — Specifies that the fabric speed supports FP2 and FP3-based cards.
The 7750 SR-7/12/12e and 7450 ESS-7/12 chassis defaults to the fabric-speed-a
when initially deployed. The chassis operates as: 100 Gb/s per slot for ESS/SR-7/12
and 200 Gb/ s per slot for SR-12e. This permits a mixture of FP2/FP3 based cards
to co-exist.
fabric-speed-b — Specifies that the fabric speed does not support FP2-based cards.
Enables the 7750 SR-7/12 and 7450 ESS-7/12 to operate at up to 200 Gb/s, and the
7750 SR-12e to operate up to 400 Gb/s. All cards in the system are required to be
T3 based (FP3 IMM and/or IOM3-XP-C or newer). The system does not support any
FP2 based cards when the chassis is set to fabric-speed-b. NOTE: For the 7750 SR-
7/12 and 7450 ESS-7/12, the chassis must have a manufacturing date of 2008 or
later (show chassis detail).
fabric-speed-c — Specifies that the fabric speed supports FP3 and FP4-based cards.
Enables the 7950 XRS-20/20e platforms to use both FP3 and FP4 based cards. This
speed is mandatory if FP4 cards are to be used.

Installation Guide
10.1.2 Configure C-XMA/XMA Parameters

The C-XMA/XMA information must be configured before ports can be configured.
After you configure the XCM, use the following CLI commands to provision C-XMAs/
XMAs.
Note: For consistency across platforms, C-XMAs/XMAs are modeled in SR OS (CLI and
SNMP) as MDAs (Media Dependant Adapters).
A maximum of two C-XMAs/XMAs can be configured on an XCM. In the config>card

context, use the following CLI commands and syntax examples to provision the
C-XMAs/XMAs:
CLI Syntax: mda mda-slot

mda-type mda-type
power-priority-level 1..200
exit
Example: ALA-1>config>card# mda 1

ALA-1>config>card>mda# mda-type cx2-100g-cfp
ALA-1>config>card>mda# power-priority-level 130
ALA-1>config>card>mda# exit
ALA-1>config>card# mda 2
ALA-1>config>card>mda# mda-type cx20-10g-sfp
ALA-1>config>card>mda# power-priority-level 135

Installation Guide
The following example displays the card slot, card type, MDA slot, and MDA type
command usage:
XRS20e>config# card 1
XRS20e>config>card# card-type XCM-X20ee
XRS20e>config>card# mda 1
XRS20e>config>card>mda# mda-type cx2-100g-cfp
XRS20e>config>card>mda# power-priority-level 130
XRS20e>config>card>mda# exit
XRS20e>config>card# mda 2
XRS20e>config>card>mda# mda-type cx20-10g-sfp
XRS20e>config>card>mda# power-priority-level 135
XRS20e>config>card>mda# exit
The following example displays the configuration:
XRS20e>config# info
. . .
----------------------------------------------
echo "Card Configuration"
#------------------------------------------
card 1
card-type XCM-X20ee
mda 1
mda-type cx2-100g-cfp
power-priority-level 130
exit
mda 2
mda-type cx20-10g-sfp
power-priority-level 135
exit
exit
----------------------------------------------
XRS20e>config#

Installation Guide
10.2 FP4-based Card Licensing

This section describes the SROS Pay As You Grow Licensing program for FP4-
based physical cards or XMAs.
Pay As You Grow is a licensing methodology that supports the purchase and
activation of FP4-based physical cards or XMAs. The program is aimed at
addressing capacity requirements as networks change and expand. The SROS Pay
As You Grow program provides the following benefits:
• One physical card can perform multiple roles such as core, peering, business
edge, residential edge, and aggregation, among others.
• Pay As You Grow allows customers to change the role of physical cards
without having to change the hardware.
• (Phase 2, Release 16.0.R4) Beginning in SROS Release 16.0.R4, Nokia
introduces the FP4-based licensing upgrade program. This program enables
you to upgrade the capability level or functional level of your hardware by
purchasing software upgrade licenses.
10.2.1 Overview
Beginning in SROS Release 16.0.R1, Nokia introduces licensing for all FP4-based
hardware assemblies. Each physical card or XMA supports multiple variants. All
variants use the same card-type or mda-type but have different license-levels
encoded in the hardware. Each license level specifies the hardware capacity and
functional capabilities for that variant.
Each assembly supporting licensing must be provisioned for both card-type and
card-level. There are no restrictions on mixing cards of different levels in the same
chassis.
10.2.1.1 Hardware Capacity
This attribute of the license level enables the physical capabilities of an assembly,
such as the number of enabled connectors, the type of transceivers that can be used,
the total bandwidth available to the assembly, and the support for over-subscription
and intelligent fan in/out to control the packet flow from the E4 chip to the P4 chip.

Installation Guide
10.2.1.2 Hardware Functionality
This attribute of the license level enables service capabilities based on the number
of egress hardware queues and egress policers.
10.2.2 Building Blocks of Licensing

The building blocks of licensing include the following components:
• Connectors (optical transceivers)

• E4 chipset
• P4 chipset
• base card
10.2.2.1 Connectors
Licenses determine the number and type of connectors that can be enabled.
Unlicensed connectors are blocked.
10.2.2.2 E4 Chipset
The E4 chipset provides media access control (MAC) layer processing. The E4
chipset supports a maximum throughput of 1Tb/s (full duplex), and cannot be
oversubscribed.
10.2.2.3 P4 Chipset
The P4 chipset provides advanced queuing and packet prioritizing services. The P4
chipset supports a maximum throughput of 1.2 Tb/s (full duplex).

Installation Guide
10.2.2.4 Base Card
The base card groups are defined by the type of connector that is supported on the
highest capacity base card. For example, the capacity of the universal 24-port
QSFP28 XMA is achieved using QSFP28 connectors.
10.2.3 Hardware Functional Level Licenses

All FP4-based hardware assemblies support functional license levels that control the
number of available egress hardware queues and egress policers and limit the
number of services that can be configured on an assembly.
Each 3HE part number contains a two-letter suffix which represents the functional
variant activated by the license:
• AA for Core Routing (CR)

• BA for Edge Routing (ER)
• CA for High-scale Edge Routing (HE)
10.2.3.1 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA
Table 71 lists the license part numbers available for the 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA.
The mda-type for all of these parts is x6-400g-cfp8.
Table 71 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA Part Numbers List
Part Number Description CLI Strings and

License Levels
3HE13812AA XMA - 7950 XRS 4-port CFP8 XMA - CR; see Figure 85 cr1600g
3HE12324AA XMA - 7950 XRS 6-port CFP8 XMA - CR; see Figure 86 cr2400g
3HE13812BA XMA - 7950 XRS 4-port CFP8 XMA - ER; see Figure 85 er1600g
3HE12324BA XMA - 7950 XRS 6-port CFP8 XMA - ER; see Figure 86 er2400g
3HE13812CA XMA - 7950 XRS 4-port CFP8 XMA - HE; see Figure 85 he1600g
3HE12324CA XMA - 7950 XRS 6-port CFP8 XMA - HE; see Figure 86 he2400g

Installation Guide
Figure 85 2-complex 1.6T 4-port CFP8 (3HE13812xA)

Connector Key
Connector can be configured
X Connector cannot be configured
400G
1
E4
800G
2 400G
E4 P4
3
X E4
1.6T
400G
4
E4
800G
5 400G
E4 P4
6
X E4
3HE13812xA
sw0569
Figure 86 2-complex 2.4T 6-port CFP8 (3HE12324xA)

Connector Key
400G
1
E4
1.2T
2 400G
E4 P4
3 400G
E4
2.4T
400G
4
E4
1.2T
5 400G
E4 P4
6 400G
E4
3HE12324xA
sw0570

Installation Guide
10.2.3.1.1 2-complex 6-port CFP8 XMA Upgrade Licenses
Table 72 lists the available upgrade licenses for this XMA.
Table 72 2-complex 6-port CFP8 Upgrade Licenses
Part Number Description
3HE13874AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 1.6T CR to 2.4T CR

3HE13875AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 1.6T ER to 2.4T ER
3HE13876AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 1.6T HE to 2.4T HE
3HE13877AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 1.6T CR to 1.6T ER
3HE13878AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 1.6T ER to 1.6T HE
3HE13879AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 2.4T CR to 2.4T ER
3HE13880AA UPG - XRS XMA CFP8 2.4T ER to 2.4T HE
10.2.3.2 1-complex 6-port CFP2-DCO XMA
Table 73 lists the license part numbers available for the 1-complex 6-port CFP2-DCO
XMA. The mda-type for all of these parts is x6-200g-cfp2dco.
Table 73 1-complex 6-port CFP2-DCO Part Numbers List

License Levels
3HE14665AA XMA - 7950 XRS 6pt CFP2 DCO XMA - CR; see Figure 87 cr1200q
3HE14665BA XMA - 7950 XRS 6pt CFP2 DCO XMA - ER; see Figure 87 er1200g
3HE14665CA XMA - 7950 XRS 6pt CFP2 DCO XMA - HE; see Figure 87 he1200g

Installation Guide
Figure 87 1-complex 1.2T 6-port CFP2-DCO (3HE14665xA)

Connector Key
600 GE
1 2 3
E4
1.2T
P4 1.2T
600 GE
4 5 6
E4
3HE14665xA
sw0898
10.2.3.2.1 1-complex 1.2T 6-port CFP2-DCO XMA Upgrade Licenses
Table 74 1-complex 1.2T 6-port CFP2-DCO Upgrade Licenses
3HE15398AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T CR to 1.2T CFP2DCO ER

3HE15399AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T ER to 1.2T CFP2DCO HE
10.2.3.3 2-complex 24-port QSFP28 XMA
Table 75 lists the license part numbers available for the 2-complex 24-port QSFP28
XMA. The mda-type for all of these parts is x24-100g-qsfp28.
Table 75 2-complex 24-port QSFP28 XMA Part Number List

License Level
3HE13810AA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.2T 12pt QSFP28 - CR; see Figure 88 cr1200g

Installation Guide
Table 75 2-complex 24-port QSFP28 XMA Part Number List (Continued)

License Level
3HE13810BA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.2T 12pt QSFP28 - ER; see Figure 88 er1200g
3HE13810CA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.2T 12pt QSFP28 - HE; see Figure 88 he1200g
Figure 88 2-complex 1.2T 12-port QSFP28 (3HE13810xA)

Connector Key
300G
1 2 3 4 5 6
X X X E4
600G
7 8 9 10 11 12 300G
X X X E4 P4
300G 1.2T
13 14 15 16 17 18
X X X E4
600G
19 20 21 22 23 24 300G
X X X E4 P4
3HE13810xA
sw0565

Installation Guide

Connector Key
400G
1 2 3 4 5 6
X X E4
800G
7 8 9 10 11 12 400G
X X E4 P4
400G 1.6T
13 14 15 16 17 18
X X E4
800G
19 20 21 22 23 24 400G
X X E4 P4
3HE13811xA
sw0566

Connector Key
600G
1 2 3 4 5 6
E4
1.2T
7 8 9 10 11 12 600G
E4 P4
600G 2.4T
13 14 15 16 17 18
E4
1.2T
19 20 21 22 23 24 600G
E4 P4
3HE11094xA
sw0567

Installation Guide
10.2.3.3.1 2-complex 2.4T 24-port QSFP28 XMA Upgrade Licenses
Table 76 2-complex 2.4T 24-port QSFP28 Upgrade Licenses
3HE13862AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T CR to 1.6T CR

3HE13863AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T CR to 2.4T CR
3HE13864AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T ER to 1.6T ER
3HE13865AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T ER to 2.4T ER
3HE13866AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T HE to 1.6T HE
3HE13867AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T HE to 2.4T HE
3HE13868AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T CR to 1.2T ER
3HE13869AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.2T ER to 1.2T HE
10.2.3.4 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA
Table 77 lists the license part numbers available for the 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD
XMA. The mda-type for all of these parts is x12-400gqsfp-dd.
Table 77 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA Part Number List

License Level
3HE14662AA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.6T 8pt QSDP-DD - CR; see Figure 91 cr1600g
3HE14663AA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD - CR; see Figure 92 cr2400g
3HE14664AA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD to 4T - CR; see Figure 92 cr2400g+

Installation Guide
Table 77 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA Part Number List (Continued)

License Level
3HE14662BA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.6T 8pt QSDP-DD - ER; see Figure 91 er1600g
3HE14663BA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD - ER; see Figure 92 er2400g
3HE14664BA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD to 4T - ER; see Figure 92 er2400g+
3HE14662CA XMA - 7950 XRS - 1.6T 8pt QSDP-DD - HE; see Figure 91 he1600g
3HE14663CA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD - HE; see Figure 92 he2400g
3HE14664CA XMA - 7950 XRS - 2.4T 12pt QSDP-DD to 4T- HE; see Figure 92 he2400g+
Figure 91 2-complex 1.6T 8-port QSFP-DD (3HE14662xA)

Connector Key
400 GE
1 2 3
E4
800 GE
X
4 5 6 400 GE P4
X E4
1.6T
400 GE
7 8 9
E4
800 GE
X
10 11 12 400 GE P4
X E4
3HE14662xA
sw0899

Installation Guide
Figure 92 2-complex 2.4T 12-port QSFP-DD (3HE14663/4xA)

Connector Key
600 GE
1 2 3
E4
1.2T
4 5 6 600 GE P4
E4
2.4T
600 GE
7 8 9
E4
1.2T
10 11 12 600 GE P4
E4
3HE14663xA
3HE14664xA
sw0902
10.2.3.4.1 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD XMA Upgrade Licenses
Table 78 2-complex 12-port QSFP-DD Upgrade Licenses
3HE15388AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T CR to 1.6T QSFP-DD ER

3HE15389AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T ER to 1.6T QSFP-DD HE
3HE15390AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T CR to 2.4T QSFP-DD CR
3HE15391AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T ER to 2.4T QSFP-DD ER
3HE15392AA UPG - XRS XMA 1.6T HE to 2.4T QSFP-DD HE
3HE15393AA UPG - XRS XMA 2.4T CR to 2.4T QSDP-DD ER
3HE15394AA UPG - XRS XMA 2.4T ER to 2.4T QSDP-DD HE
3HE15395AA UPG - XRS XMA 2.4T to 4.0T Agg (CR, ER, HE)

Installation Guide
10.2.4 Card Activation

To enable a card assembly, the correct card-type and license-level must be
provisioned in the CLI. If the provisioned license level does not match the factory-
coded level of the installed hardware, the card is held in reset mode and cannot
operate.
One exception exists in the case where a base card is installed as a spare; see
section 10.2.4.1.
For information about how to provision cards; refer to 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7950
XRS, and VSR Interface Configuration Guide.
10.2.4.1 Provisioning Spare Cards
There are two provisioning options for licensing spare cards.
• Spare the same 3HE part numbers that are installed in the chassis.
If there are multiple levels of a given card type, then the customer can spare
those specific 3HE part numbers. When a card fails, replacing it with the
exact 3HE part numbers match will bring all services back into operation.
• Spare the highest functional level (high scale edge routing) and highest
capacity level variant for the card.
This card variant could be used to spare any variant of the card.

Installation Guide
10.3 XCM and C-XMAs/XMA Operational

Dependencies
The system supports a mix of FP3-based (XCM-X20e) XCMs with FP3-based
C-XMAs/XMAs in any slot and FP4-based (XCM2-X20) XCMs with FP4-based
C-XMAs/XMAs in any other slot.
An XCM or C-XMAs/XMA cannot be provisioned in the system unless the available

power is adequate to accommodate these cards when made operational; see
section 4.5.
At least one C-XMAs/XMA must be provisioned, installed, and of a type compatible

with the provisioned type before the XCM becomes operational. If no C-XMAs/XMA
is inserted, the XCM remains in the boot state.
If the last operational C-XMAs/XMA is removed, or goes non-operational, the XCM

reboots and then remain in the boot state until at least one C-XMAs/XMA is
operational. An SNMP trap and log event is raised to indicate that the XCM is being
reset because the last operational C-XMAs/XMA became non-operational.
If the operator performs a clear mda operation on the last operational C-XMAs/XMA
on an XCM, the associated XCM is also cleared and CLI displays an informational
message indicating that the XCM is being cleared because the only operational
C-XMAs/XMA on board was cleared.
If the operator performs a shut down on the last operational C-XMAs/XMA on an

XCM, the associated XCM is cleared and CLI displays an informational message
indicating that the XCM is being cleared because the only operational C-XMAs/XMA
was shut down.

Installation Guide
10.4 Installing XCMs
Caution: The XCMs have a large physical form factor, and are very heavy when loaded with
C-XMAs/XMAs. To reduce the risk of injury, do not install or remove XCMs with C-XMA/
XMAs installed.
Warning:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle XCMs or C-XMAs/
XMAs. Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD
strap to the grounding plug on the front or rear of the chassis; see Figure 93.
• Do not forcefully push on cards to seat them to the mid-plane connectors. This may
cause damage to connectors.
hw0051

Installation Guide
Note:
• The XCM air filter and frame must removed before the XCM can be installed.
• You can configure XCM, C-XMA/XMA, and port information before card installation.
• XCMs have a status LED (see section 15.4).
• The card slots are vertically oriented.
• XCMs are designed to fit in slots 1 through 10.
• In order for the XCM to be operational, it must be loaded with at least one C-XMA/XMA,
which must be of a type compatible with the provisioned type.
10.4.1 Removing Impedance Panels

Impedance panels are required in all empty card slots to prevent excess dust
accumulation, and to help control airflow and electromagnetic interference.
Impedance panels do not have board components or connector pins. Only remove
an impedance panel when you are ready to install an XCM.
Note: The XCM air filter and frame must removed before the impedance panel can be
removed.

Installation Guide
Figure 94 Removing Impedance Panels
hw0054
Table 79 Impedance Panel Features
Key Description
A Captive screw
B Impedance panel

Step 2. Remove the XCM air filter and frame.
Step 3. Loosen the captive screws.
Step 4. Remove the panel. Retain the panel for future use.

Installation Guide
10.4.2 Inserting XCMs into a Chassis
Note: The XCM air filter and frame must removed before the XCM can be installed. Once
the installation is complete, the XCM air filter and frame must be replaced.
You must install XCMs into a chassis without C-XMAs/XMAs inserted. Install
XCMs in chassis slots 1 through 10. The ejector levers must be positioned outward
during the card installation.
Figure 95 Inserting the XCM into the Chassis
hw0055

Step 3. Remove the XCM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed circuit board
and connector pins.

Installation Guide
Step 4. Holding the XCM by the edges, insert the XCM halfway into card cage.
Step 5. Rotate the ejector levers inward. The ejector levers must be in this position
to begin insertion.
Step 6. Push on the levers—while maintaining the inward position—until the cam
gears, located behind the levers, touch the seating surface.
Step 7. Rotate the ejector levers outward until horizontal to lock the XCM in place.
The XCM knuckle should be flush with the card-cage front face.
Step 8. Secure the XCM into place by tightening the captive screws to a torque of
32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).
Step 9. Replace the XCM air filter and frame.
10.5 Installing C-XMAs/XMAs
Caution:
• The XCMs have a large physical form factor, and are very heavy when loaded with C-
XMAs/XMAs.
• To reduce the risk of injury, do not install or remove XCMs with C-XMA/XMAs installed.
Warning:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle XCMs or C-XMAs/
XMAs. Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD
strap to the grounding plug on the front of the chassis.
• Invisible laser radiation can be emitted from the aperture ports of an C-XMA/XMA when
no cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.
• Always place components on an anti-static surface.
• Use only approved small form factor pluggables (SFPs or CFPs) in C-XMA/XMA ports.

Installation Guide
Note:
• Ports cannot be provisioned if the C-XMA/XMA is not preprovisioned.

• Services cannot be provisioned if ports are not provisioned.
• Install C-XMAs/XMAs after you load the XCM in the chassis slot.
• For configuration purposes, C-XMA/XMA slots are numbered 1 (top slot) and 2 (bottom
slot).
• At least one C-XMA/XMA must be provisioned, installed, and of a type compatible with
the provisioned type in order for the associated XCM to be operational.
10.5.1 Installing C-XMAs into a Chassis

Figure 96 Inserting C-XMAs into the Chassis
hw0056

Installation Guide
Table 80 C-XMA Features
Key Description
A C-XMA slot guides

B Threaded hole for captive screw
C Mechanical Adapter
D C-XMA

Step 2. Remove the C-XMA from the packaging. Avoid touching board components
and connector pins.
Step 3. Install the C-XMA mechanical adapter in the bottom area of the XCM card
slot.
Step 4. Holding the C-XMA by the edges, insert the C-XMA halfway into card cage.
to begin insertion.
Step 7. Rotate the ejector levers outward until horizontal to lock the C-XMA in place;
see Figure 96. The C-XMA faceplate should be flush with the card-cage
front face.
Step 8. Tighten the captive screws to secure the C-XMA. Do not over-tighten. The
recommended torque is 15 lbf·in (1.69 N·m).
Step 9. Attach cables to the C-XMA ports.

Installation Guide
10.5.2 Installing XMAs into a Chassis

Figure 97 Inserting XMAs into the Chassis
hw0058
Table 81 XMA Features
Key Description
A XMA slot guides

B Threaded hole for captive screw
C XMA
D XMA

Installation Guide

Step 2. Remove the XMA from the packaging. Avoid touching board components
and connector pins.
Step 3. Holding the XMA by the edges, insert the XMA halfway into card cage.
to begin insertion.
Step 6. Rotate the ejector levers outward until horizontal to lock the XMA in place;
see Figure 97. The XMA face plate should be flush with the card-cage front
face.
Step 7. Tighten the captive screws to secure the XMA. Do not over-tighten. The
recommended torque is 15 lbf·in (1.69 N·m).
Step 8. Attach cables to the XMA ports.

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling
Installation Guide
11 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling

• Rear Cable Guides, section 11.1
• Switch Fabric Connections, section 11.2
• Control Plane Connections, section 11.3
• Timing and Frequency Synchronization, section 11.4
Note:
• SFM interconnect cable guides must be installed to ensure correct cable routing;
see section 11.1.
• The optical interconnect cables will have the numbered labels (pre-applied) when
shipped from the factory.
• Replacement cable bundles may not have the bundle numbers pre-applied. A label set
(with all the numbers) is shipped with the replacement cable bundles. A label with the
appropriate number could be used for the replacement cable bundle.
• Only Nokia supplied SFM interconnect cables are supported. The system will check and
reject any other cables and raise a log event.
11.1 Rear Cable Guides

system, you must install rear cable guides on both chassis for proper routing of the
SFM interconnect cable bundles. The rear cable guide kit (Figure 98) consists of:
cable guides, tie-down brackets, and mounting screws.
Step 1. Verify that the master chassis and extension chassis are properly
positioned relative to each other for the cables to comfortably reach
between them, see section 6.2.
Step 2. Unpack the 7950 XRS-40 Rear Cable Guide Kit and identify the parts.
Note: the label on each guide that indicates on which chassis, and in which
position to mount the guide. The kit also contains:
− Two groups of tie-down brackets, short (for up to two cables) and long
(for up to four cables).
− A bag containing two groups of screws; standard rack-mounting and
smaller cable-guide mounting.

7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Figure 98 7950 XRS-40 Rear Cable Guide Kit
Master - Upper Position
Master - Lower Position
Extension - Upper Position
Extension - Lower Position
XRS40_14

Installation Guide
Step 3. On the extension chassis, mount lower and upper cable guide to the chassis
using the supplied screws.
Figure 99 Mounting 7950 XRS-40 Rear Cable Guides
hw0076
Step 4. On the master chassis, mount lower and upper cable guide to the chassis
using the supplied screws.

Installation Guide
Step 5. Mount tie-down brackets to best support the interconnect cable scheme.
Figure 100 Tie-down Bracket
XRS40_15

Installation Guide
11.2 Switch Fabric Connections

system, traffic from any port on one of the 7950 XRS-20e system is seamlessly
switched to any other port on the same 7950 XRS-20e, or the other 7950 XRS-20e
system. This is made possible when the switch fabric of one 7950 XRS-20e chassis
is connected to the switch fabric of the other chassis.
This inter-connection is achieved by connecting each of the optical extension port on

the back of the SFMs using active optical cables. These cables are special MPO/
MPT fiber-optical cables, which are 10m or 30m long and have integrated CXP optics
on the ends of the cables.
There are 14 cables in a bundle that interconnect one SFM in the master chassis to
its corresponding SFM in the extension chassis. Each of the cables within a bundle
is numbered from 1 to 14. There are eight bundles to interconnect each of the SFMs;
see Figure 101.

Installation Guide
Figure 101 SFM Interconnect Cable
Example:
Routes to SFM 9
on the Extension Chassis
Master Extension
Chassis Chassis
SFM 1 SFM 9
to 1 on to 1 on
Extension Master
1 1
1
14
1 1
14
1 1
1
2 2
2
13
2 2
2
13
2
2
3 3
3
12
3 3
3
12
3 3
3
4 4
4
11
4 4
4
4
11
4
5 5
5
5
10
5 5
5
10
5
5
6 6
6
6
6 6
9
6
6 6
6
9
7 7
7
7
7 7
7
8
7 7
7
8
8 8
8
8
8 8
7
8
8 8
8
7
9 9
9
9
9 9
9
6
9 9
9
6
10 10
10
10
10 10
10
5
10
10
10
5
11
11
11 11
11
11 11
11
11 11
4
12
12 12
12
12 12
12
12
12
12
3
13
13 13
13
13 13
13
13
13
13
2
2
14
14 14
14
14 14 14
14
14
14
1
1
to 14 on to 14 on
Extension Master
Example:
Routes to SFM 1
on the Master Chassis
al_0479

Installation Guide
To make it easy for the installation and to avoid confusion making port connections,
the cables within a bundle have staggered lengths such that they line up with the
appropriate port in the correct position within the SFM. The 14 cables are enclosed
in a black sleeve forming an optical cable bundle. There are 8 of these bundles
provided as part an optical cable kit for interconnecting two 7950 XRS-20e systems
in a multi-shelf configuration making an 7950 XRS-40 system.
Each end of the cable bundle (within a sleeve) is numbered indicating the SFM slot
in which the cables connects. For the 7950 XRS-40, the SFM slots on the master
chassis are numbered from 1-8 and the SFM slots on the extension chassis are
numbered from 9-16.
Figure 102 7950 XRS-40 SFM Slot Numbering Scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Master
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Extension
al 0440
In addition to the numbering, the LED on each of the optical port on the SFM, help in
diagnosing cabling related issues. When the LED on the SFM port is amber and
blinking slowly, it indicates that the SFM interconnect cables are connected to the
wrong port. By looking at other similar ports with blinking amber LEDs on the same,
or different SFM, you can try to figure out which of the ports are connected
incorrectly; see section 15.3.2. You can also use the tools command to check the
correctness of the connections; see section 11.2.2.2.

Installation Guide
Figure 103 SFM Interconnections
Master Extension
route to 9 >
route to 11 >
route to 13 >
route to 15 >
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
route to 16 >
route to 14 >
route to 12 >
route to 10 >
al_0477
Each of the ports on an SFM in one 7950 XRS-20e chassis is connected to the same
SFM port in the same slot on the other 7950 XRS-20e chassis. For an 7950 XRS-40
system to function properly, all ports on the 7950 XRS-20e master chassis must be
connected to the same numbered port/slot on the 7950 XRS-20e extension chassis.
11.2.1 Cable Routing

Half of the SFM interconnect cables are routed through the upper cable guide and
the other half are routed through the lower cable guide; see Figure 104. One end of
the cable which is routed through the upper cable guide of one of the systems is
routed through the lower cable guide of the other system.

Installation Guide
Figure 104 SFM Interconnect Cable Routing
hw0077
Step 1. Install and route CPM and SFM interconnect cables.

Step 2. Use Velcro ties to secure cables to tie-down brackets; see Figure 100.

Installation Guide
11.2.2 Switch Fabric Monitoring

The 7950 XRS-40 switch fabric is monitored at system startup and during in-service
operations. In addition, an operator can run on-demand diagnostics using tools
commands when initially commissioning an 7950 XRS-40 system, or when migrating
an 7950 XRS-20e to and 7950 XRS-40.
11.2.2.1 Startup Diagnostics
Startup diagnostics can detect the following conditions:
• SFM mis-cabling
• Unsupported CXP optical devices
11.2.2.2 On-Demand Diagnostics
Use the following tools command to initiate the SFM interconnect loop tests:
tools perform system inter-chassis sfm-interco-test
Run on an out-of-service standalone chassis that will later become the extension
chassis of an 7950 XRS-40 system. The out of service chassis (chassis 1 – future
master chassis) must be connected by means of SFM interconnect links (cable
bundles) before this test is run. This test operates without requiring any XCMs in
either chassis, but they can be present.
The test should not be initiated from Chassis 1.
The following conditions must be satisfied for the test to be permitted:
• The system must be in standalone mode; error message:

The test can only be performed on a standalone system
• The system must have only 7950 XRS-40 compatible SFMs provisioned;
error message:
The chassis can not have SFMs with a configured type of
sfm-x20s-b when performing the test
• All provisioned SFMs must be operational; error message:
All provisioned SFMs must be operational before
performing the test

Installation Guide
• The same test cannot be running in another session (i.e. only one test can be
executed at a time); error message:
The test is already in-progress in another session
Other notes that are displayed to the operator when the test is attempted:
• All provisioned XCMs will be reset at the start of the test and will be held in
the booting state until the test has completed.
• All SFMs will be cleared when the operator exits the test. This will trigger a
reset of the XCMs and the standby CPM.
Sample Output
*A:Dut-A# tools perform system inter-chassis sfm-interco-test

WARNING: This test is intended for an out-of-service standalone chassis that is
going to later become the extension chassis of an XRS-40 system.
At the start of the test, all provisioned IOMs will be reset and will be held
in the 'booting' state until the test has completed.
While the test is running avoid altering this system or the attached system
(e.g. do not shut down, clear, or remove the CPMs/SFMs/IOMs and do not issue
CPM switchovers)
Once testing has completed all SFMs in this system will be cleared.
Do you wish to proceed (y/n)? y

Clearing provisioned IOMs ...
Test executing ...
Displaying results
===============================================================================
SFM Interconnect Port Summary
===============================================================================
SFM SFM IcPort IcPort Module Degrade Miscon Info
Oper State Num Oper State Inserted State SFM IcPort
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 up 1 up yes none
1 up 2 up yes none
1 up 3 up yes none
1 up 4 up yes none
1 up 5 up yes none
1 up 6 up yes none
1 up 7 up yes none
1 up 8 up yes none
1 up 9 up yes none
1 up 10 up yes none
1 up 11 up yes none
1 up 12 up yes none
1 up 13 up yes none
1 up 14 up yes none
2 up 1 up yes none
2 up 2 up yes none
2 up 3 up yes none
2 up 4 up yes none

Installation Guide
2 up 5 up yes none
2 up 6 up yes none
2 up 7 up yes none
2 up 8 up yes none
2 up 9 up yes none
2 up 10 up yes none
2 up 11 up yes none
2 up 12 up yes none
2 up 13 up yes none
2 up 14 up yes none
3 up 1 up yes none
3 up 2 up yes none
3 up 3 up yes none
3 up 4 up yes none
3 up 5 up yes none
3 up 6 up yes none
3 up 7 up yes none
3 up 8 up yes none
3 up 9 up yes none
3 up 10 up yes none
3 up 11 up yes none
3 up 12 up yes none
3 up 13 up yes none
3 up 14 up yes none
4 up 1 up yes none
4 up 2 up yes none
4 up 3 up yes none
4 up 4 up yes none
4 up 5 up yes none
4 up 6 up yes none
4 up 7 up yes none
4 up 8 up yes none
4 up 9 up yes none
4 up 10 up yes none
4 up 11 up yes none
4 up 12 up yes none
4 up 13 up yes none
4 up 14 up yes none
5 up 1 up yes none
5 up 2 up yes none
5 up 3 up yes none
5 up 4 up yes none
5 up 5 up yes none
5 up 6 up yes none
5 up 7 up yes none
5 up 8 up yes none
5 up 9 up yes none
5 up 10 up yes none
5 up 11 up yes none
5 up 12 up yes none
5 up 13 up yes none
5 up 14 up yes none
6 up 1 up yes none
6 up 2 up yes none
6 up 3 up yes none
6 up 4 up yes none
6 up 5 up yes none
6 up 6 up yes none
6 up 7 up yes none

Installation Guide
6 up 8 up yes none
6 up 9 up yes none
6 up 10 up yes none
6 up 11 up yes none
6 up 12 up yes none
6 up 13 up yes none
6 up 14 up yes none
7 up 1 up yes none
7 up 2 up yes none
7 up 3 up yes none
7 up 4 up yes none
7 up 5 up yes none
7 up 6 up yes none
7 up 7 up yes none
7 up 8 up yes none
7 up 9 up yes none
7 up 10 up yes none
7 up 11 up yes none
7 up 12 up yes none
7 up 13 up yes none
7 up 14 up yes none
8 up 1 up yes none
8 up 2 up yes none
8 up 3 up yes none
8 up 4 up yes none
8 up 5 up yes none
8 up 6 up yes none
8 up 7 up yes none
8 up 8 up yes none
8 up 9 up yes none
8 up 10 up yes none
8 up 11 up yes none
8 up 12 up yes none
8 up 13 up yes none
8 up 14 up yes none
===============================================================================
Correct any mis-cabling and replace any suspected faulty equipment. Press Q to
quit the test or any other key to run the test again. q
Test complete, clearing the SFMs to return them to normal operational state.
Done. Exiting test.

Installation Guide
11.2.2.3 SFM Link Failure Behavior
Each of the 7950 XRS chassis in 7950 XRS-40 have eight SFMs. Failure of a single
SFM on either of the chassis will not affect the capacity of the system essentially
providing 7+1 redundancy on each of the units. If there are more than one failed
SFMs in a single chassis (in either of the chassis), this may result in degradation of
bandwidth (similar to the behavior on a single XSR-20 system).
Removal, or loss of multiple additional fabric cables in a system, which has already
lost an SFM, may result in degradation of bandwidth.
Failure, or removal of an SFM is reported through a log event as in the case of

7950 XRS-20e. In addition, any of the CXP optics removal, port down, or link down
(detected through in service monitoring) are all reported through log events.

Installation Guide
11.3 Control Plane Connections

Though physically two 7950 XRS-20e systems are connected to create an
7950 XRS-40 system, the 7950 XRS-40 is presented as a single system with a total
of 20 XCM slots. At 7950 XRS-40 system setup, one of the 7950 XRS-20e systems
is designated as the master chassis while the other 7950 XRS-20e is designated as
the extension chassis. The CPM modules in the master chassis are managing the
entire system (as the primary central active and standby CPMs). The CPMs in the
extension chassis (acting in an extension CPM role) provide local chassis, card and
power management, synchronization, and message relaying functions. To maximize
fault tolerance, it is essential that each of the CPMs in the master chassis have
physical access to the CPMs in the extension chassis.
Figure 105 CPM Interconnections
Master Extension
to D2 >
CPM-A CPM-B CPM-C CPM-D
A1 B1 to C2 > C1 D1
A2 B2 C2 D2
to C1 >
to D1 >
al_0478
The active CPM has three ways of reaching the CPMs on the extension chassis. If
all three paths are down, and the active CPM cannot reach the CPMs on the
extension chassis, and the system is in 7950 XRS-40 mode, then a log event and
alarm are raised.
The CPM modules from the master chassis are connected to the CPM modules on
the extension chassis through the QSFP optical ports present on the CPM modules.
These ports are called CPM Interconnect Ports. The ports from the master chassis
and extension chassis are connected in such a way that failover conditions are
handled properly. The correct port connections are shown in Figure 105.
Note: The CPM interconnect ports only come up if ALU-approved QSFP optics (integrated
cable/module) are installed. A log event is raised if a non-ALU cable/module is used.

Installation Guide
11.3.1 CPM Link Failure Behavior

The system behaves in a consistent and reliable manner when there are failures in
the CPM interconnect links. Some key points to note:
• The link failures could be due to failures in any one of the ports which part of
the link; failure in the optics or the optical cable itself.
• Failures of CPM Interconnect links raise a log event irrespective of the ability
to reach the target CPM through other means:
• The reachability of the other CPMs from the active as well as standby CPM
is continuously checked.
• Both active and standby CPMs on the master chassis monitor whether they
can reach at least one CPM in the extension chassis via the two CPM
interconnect ports. In 7950 XRS-40 mode log events indicate when this
reachability is lost or gained.
• Show commands display the status of each of the (up to) 8 CPM interconnect
ports.
Up / Down and an error code.
• The active CPM has three ways of reaching the CPMs on the extension
chassis. For example if CPM A is active:
L1
P1 P1
CPMA P2 P2 CPMC
L2
L5 L6
L3
P1 P1
CPMB CPMD
P2 P2
L4
Master Shelf (1) Extension Shelf (2)
al_0441
− L1
− L2
− L5 and then L3, or L4
If all three paths are down, and the active CPM cannot reach the CPMs on
the extension chassis, and the system is in 7950 XRS-40 mode, then a log
event and alarm are raised.

Installation Guide
The cards in the extension chassis will behave as follows in this case:
− The extension CPMs reboot and wait in boot-up state until connections
are restored
− The extension XCMs/XMAs stop passing traffic shortly after reachability
is lost. Once the extension CPMs are up the IOMs will reboot and then
come back into service.
− The extension SFMs continue passing traffic (master chassis line cards
still have full fabric capacity, although IGP overload will be triggered if
configured with single-sfm-overload). Once the extension CPMs are up,
the SFMs will be reinitialized resulting in some traffic interruptions and
temporary reduced fabric capacity for line cards in the master chassis.
− When CPM interconnect links are restored, a clearing log event is sent
and the alarm is cleared.

Installation Guide
11.3.2 CPM Failure/Switchover Behavior

The 7950 XRS-40 system handles CPM failover in a hitless manner similar to that on
an 7950 XRS-20e system.
Where CPM A is the active CPM:
• CPM A fails due to a fault:

− The standby CPM B will take over; no changes to the states of CPM C or
CPM D.
− Alarm is raised as it is in the case of an 7950 XRS-20e.
• CPM B fails due to a fault:
− Alarm is raised.
• CPM C or D fails due to a fault:
− A log event and facility alarm is raised. No switchover occurs on Chassis
1 (the activity of CPMs on Chassis 1 are independent of whatever
happens on the CPMs on Chassis 2). A single CPM failing on Chassis 2
does not affect the operation of the system.
• Both CPM C and D go operationally down (fail, removed, cleared, etc):
− Same as when tmnxInterChassisCommsDown occurs for removal or
failure of CPM or Interconnect cables; see section 11.3.1.
• User initiated failover:
− If CPM B is able to reach either CPM C or CPM D via its local CPM
interconnect links, the failover will go through normally (with the normal
checks).
− If CPM B is not able to reach either CPM C or CPM D via its local CPM
interconnect links (i.e. the tmnxCpmNoLocalIcPort is raised for the
standby CPM), there will be a warning indicating this fact:
*A:myNode# admin redundancy force-switchover
MINOR: The standby CPM cannot communicate with the extension chassis using
its local CPM interconnect ports. A switchover will cause loss of fabric
capacity and line card I/O provided on the extension chassis. Use the ‘ignore-
status’ keyword to override this check.
− Users must force a switchover because this could result in the extension
chassis going down. If the standby CPM can talk to Chassis 2 via the
other CPM, then Chassis 2 is recovered after the previously active CPM
reboots.
Note: Similar actions occur when CPM B is the active CPM with their roles reversed.

Installation Guide
11.4 Timing and Frequency Synchronization

If some ports on the node are to be used as synchronous ports for frequency
distribution (e.g. Synchronous Ethernet), then the extension chassis must be cabled
to support this option. This involves connecting the BITS input ports on the Extension
chassis to a suitable source.
Note: If there is no requirement for synchronous ports on the node, then there is no need
to cable the BITS ports on the Extension chassis and the remainder of this section can be
ignored
The extension chassis is restricted to use only its BITS input ports as frequency
references. There are two supported options for providing timing into these ports on
the extension chassis:
• In deployments where the frequency reference is provided by a co-located

BITS device, then the deployment must provide redundant frequency feeds
to each chassis, see Figure 106.
• In deployments where there is no BITS device, then the BITS output ports of
the master chassis must be cabled to the BITS input ports of the extension
chassis, see Figure 107. This configuration also requires some minimal
configuration of the synchronization subsystem; see section 14.2.
Note: The BITS input port comprises the Receiver Tip and Ring Signal pins of the BITS
Cable Connector and the BITS output port comprises the Transmit Tip and Ring Signal pins
of the BITS Cable Connector (see section 17)

Installation Guide
Figure 106 Deployment with Co-located BITS Equipment
BITS
CCM A CCM B CCM C CCM D

BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout
CPM A CPM B CPM C CPM D
SETS SETS SETS SETS
fa fb fa fb
Master Chassis Extension Chassis

al_0442

Installation Guide
Figure 107 Deployment Where no BITS Equipment is Available
CCM A CCM B CCM C CCM D

BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout BITSin BITSout
CPM A CPM B CPM C CPM D
SETS SETS SETS SETS
fa fb fa fb
Master Chassis Extension Chassis

al_0443

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Establishing Router Connections
Installation Guide
12 Establishing Router Connections

• Console Connection, section 12.1
• Remote Access, section 12.2
The initial connection to the router must be made by means of the RS232 (console)
port. Some additional configuration is necessary before other types of router
connections are possible, such as SSH or Telnet.
Note:
• All system access is through the CCMs.

• 7950 XRS-20e:
− CCM-A handles all control and interface functions for CPM-A.
− CCM-B handles all control and interface functions for CPM-B.
• 7950 XRS-40:
− CCM-C handles all control and interface functions for CPM-C.
− CCM-D handles all control and interface functions for CPM-D.
12.1 Console Connection

To establish a console connection, you will need the following:
• An ASCII terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software set to the

parameters shown in the table below.
• A standard serial cable with a RJ-45 connector. For pin assignment
information, see section 17.
Table 82 Console Configuration Parameter Values
Parameter Value
Baud rate 115 200

Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control None

Establishing Router Connections 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note: Route all cables to the CCMs in the CCM cable guide located above the CCMs.
Step 1. Grab the lower edge of the CCM cable cover and lift it up to access the cable
guide.
hw0138
Step 2. Route all cables to the CCMs in the CCM cable guide located above the
CCMs.
hw0074
Step 3. Connect the terminal to the RS232 (console) port on the CCM (Figure 31)
using a serial cable, route the cable inside the cable guide pathway, and
replace the cable guide cover.
If you use a null modem cable to connect to the serial port of a PC, make
sure that the switch beside the console port is set to DTE.
If you use a straight-through cable to connect to the serial port of a PC,
make sure that the switch is set to DCE.
Step 4. Power on the terminal.

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Establishing Router Connections
Installation Guide
Step 5. Establish the connection by pressing Enter a few times on your terminal
keyboard.
Step 6. At the router prompt, enter your login and password.
The default login is admin. The default password is admin.
For security reasons, change the default password as soon as possible, to prevent
unauthorized system access.
12.2 Remote Access

Before remote access is possible by means of the management Ethernet port on the
CCM, the system must be configured with a system management IP address in the
BOF.
— bof address <ip-prefix/ip-prefix-length>
MAC addresses are listed on a small label on the chassis, XCMs, and C-XMAs/
XMAs. The MAC address also displays in the show router arp command output.
For information about configuring router parameters, refer to 7950 SR OS Basic

System Configuration Guide.
For pin assignment information, see section 17.
12.2.1 SSH Connection

Access to the router is possible with an SSH connection after some basic system
configuration has been performed; typically by means of the RS232 (console) port;
see Figure 31.
The system must be configured to accept SSH connections as shown below.
— configure system security ssh no server-shutdown

Establishing Router Connections 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
12.2.2 Telnet Connection

Access to the router is possible with a Telnet connection after some basic system
configuration has been performed; typically by means of the RS232 (console) port;
see Figure 31.
The system must be configured to accept Telnet connections as shown below.
— configure system security telnet-server
12.2.2.1 Running Telnet
Once the IP parameters are configured, the CLI command line can be accessed with
a Telnet connection. To establish a Telnet connection, run a Telnet program and
issue the Telnet command, followed by the IP address.
The following displays an example of a Telnet login:
C:\>telnet 192.168.1.111
Login: admin
Password: ########
XR20#

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up
Installation Guide
13 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up

• Powering Up the System, section 13.1
• System Boot-up, section 13.2
13.1 Powering Up the System

Step 1. Verify that chassis ground connections are made and secure.
Step 2. On the power Distribution Panel, switch all circuit breaker to the ON
position.
Step 3. On the plant distribution panel for the 7950 chassis, switch all power feed
circuit breakers to the ON position.
Step 4. Verify system start up by monitoring the status LEDs on the following
components:
CCM LEDs, section 15.1
APEQ LEDs, section 15.6
PCM LEDs, section 15.7
Fan Tray LEDs, section 15.8
Note: On bootup, the fans slowly ramp to the appropriate speed required for ambient and
device operating temperatures.
13.2 System Boot-up

The primary copy of Operating System (OS) software is located on a compact flash
card that must be installed in Compact Flash Slot #3 (cf3:) in the active CCM. The
removable media shipped with each software license contains a copy of the OS
software.

7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Note:
• The CCMs contain one internal drive (cf1:) and two slots for removable compact flash
cards. The internal drive is named Compact Flash Slot #1 (cf1:). The two external drives
are named Compact Flash Slot #2 (cf2:), and Compact Flash Slot #3 (cf3:).
Configurations and executable images can be stored on flash cards, the internal drive
(cf1), or an FTP file location.
• The flash card containing the bootstrap and boot option files must be installed in
Compact Flash Slot #3 (cf3:) on the CCM.
• You must have a console connection. See section 12.1 on the active CCM.
13.2.1 Initial System Boot-up

Step 1. When you install the compact flash card in the cf3: slot, the Compact Flash
3 LED on the active CCM front panel should light green within
approximately 30 seconds. If it does not light or if it turns off, see
section 13.2.2.
Step 2. Press the Reset button on the active CPM or power cycle the router to
initiate the boot process.
Step 3. The system searches cf3: for the boot.ldr file (also known as the
bootstrap file).
Step 4. Verify the operational status by checking the CCM status LED; see
Table 84.
Step 5. After verifying the LEDs, proceed by establishing a connection to the
system.
13.2.2 Troubleshooting
If the Compact Flash 3 LED does not light after 30 seconds, the compact flash card
is probably faulty. If the system cannot load or cannot find the boot.ldr file on cf3:,
the Compact Flash 3 LED will turn off and the system will check for a manual boot
sequence interruption. A manual boot sequence interruption is performed by
connecting a terminal to a console port and hitting any key when prompted by the
display. Unless you manually interrupted an unsuccessful system initialization, the
system continuously reboots in an attempt to successfully find and load the
boot.ldr file. Load a compact flash card with the appropriate boot.ldr file into
the cf3: slot.

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up
Installation Guide
When the system finds the boot.ldr file, the system processes the initialization
parameters from the BOF (boot option file). The BOF should be on the same drive
as the boot loader file. If the BOF cannot be found or loaded, then the system prompts
for a different image and configuration location.
When the image is successfully loaded, control is passed from the boot loader file to
the image. The runtime image attempts to locate the configuration file as configured
in the BOF. The configuration file include chassis, XCM, C-XMA/XMA, and port
configurations, as well as system, routing, and service configurations.
The following example displays the output when either no flash is present or the
boot.ldr file cannot be found.
Nokia 7950 XRS

Build: X-0.0.x.x on Thu Apr 06 21:05:50 2012 by builder
Starting CPU/Switch card
COLD boot on processor #1
CPU Control FPGA version is 0x17
Testing mainboard FPGA chain...
Validating SDRAM from 0x7ff00000 to 0x80000000
Testing SDRAM from 0x02200000 to 0x7ff00000
Testing Compact Flash 1... Slot Empty
Peripheral FPGA version is 0x13
Board Serial Number is 'rus4-07'
Chassis Serial Number is '0103010009'
Searching for boot.ldr on local drives:
No disk in cf3
No disk in cf3
No disk in cf3
Error - file boot.ldr not found on any drive
Please insert CF containing boot.ldr. Rebooting in 5 seconds.
Rebooting...
Nokia
Build: X-0.0.x.x on Thu Apr 06 21:05:50 2012 by builder
Starting CPU/Switch card
It is important that cables connected to the console port on the system are properly
terminated so as to not negatively affect the functioning of the router. Terminal
servers should be properly configured so that unwanted signals from the connected
device do not launch.
Noisy lines can be interpreted by the router as key strokes and could interrupt the
boot sequence resulting in an outage. After reboot, the CPM can go into a continuous
reboot cycle if random characters received on the console port interrupts the boot
process.

7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
To prevent this from happening, terminate all console connections. If a terminal

server is connected to the CCM, ensure that it is configured to not send unwanted
characters to the CPM that could interrupt the boot cycle. This could be done by
configuring a no exec or equivalent CLI command on the terminal server.
Figure 108 displays the compact flash directory structure and file names.
Figure 108 Files on the Compact Flash
ROOT
bof.cfg boot.ldr config.cfg TiMOS-m.n.Yz
cpm.tim xcm.tim *.tim

OSSG742
Files on the compact flash are:
• bof.cfg — Boot option file

• boot.ldr — Bootstrap image
• config.cfg — Default configuration file
• OS-m.n.Yz:
m — Major release number
n — Minor release number
Y:
− A — Alpha release
− B — Beta release
− M — Maintenance release
− R — Released software
z — Version number
• cpm.tim — CPM image file
• iom.tim — XCM image file
• *.tim — other.tim files (all are required)

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis 7950 XRS-40 System Bring-Up
Installation Guide
14 7950 XRS-40 System Bring-Up

• System Migration and Bring-up Procedure, section 14.1
• Reverting to Separate 7950 XRS-20e Routers, section 14.1.2
• System Boot-up, section 14.2
• Recovery of an Isolated Extension Chassis, section 14.3
14.1 System Migration and Bring-up Procedure

The are two scenarios for 7950 XRS-40 migration and bring-up.
• An 7950 XRS-20e is already in service and you want to migrate your system
to an 7950 XRS-40 by adding an extension (7950 XRS-20e) chassis and
cross-connecting it to you existing 7950 XRS-20e.
• You are installing a new pair of 7950 XRS-20e chassis and cross-connecting
them to create a single 7950 XRS-40 system.
The system migration and bring-up procedure is essentially the same for both cases.
Where you are upgrading an 7950 XRS-20e already in service, you can perform
many of the steps without any interruption to service.
When upgrading an 7950 XRS-20e system—which is in service—to an 7950 XRS-

40, the upgrade procedure requires a reboot which would interrupt the service for a
few minutes. With SR OS release 14.0 onwards, the upgrade can be done in service
with no reboot required.
Note:
• Before you begin to migrate an 7950 XRS-20e already in service, you must upgrade all
SFMs to sfm-x20-b, or later version switch-fabric cards.
• This procedure does not support combining two in-service 7950 XRS-20e systems into
a single 7950 XRS-40 system. One of the 7950 XRS-20e system must be
decommissioned and taken out of service prior to the migration.
Step 1. Upgrade Chassis 1 (the in-service 7950 XRS-20e system in a migration

scenario, which will be commissioned as the master chassis of the
77950 XRS-40 system) to a desired software image that supports
7950 XRS-40 (12.0.R4 or later).
Step 2. If applicable, upgrade the SFMs in Chassis 1 to sfm-x20-b cards only.

7950 XRS-40 System Bring-Up 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
Step 3. Physically commission the second 7950 XRS-20e (extension) chassis as a

standalone 7950 XRS-20e system with power, fan trays, CPMs, CCMs, and
desired XCMs and XMAs. See section 13.
Note: Test Chassis 2 with the same power management configuration as
Chassis 1
Step 4. Bootup Chassis 2 (as a standalone system) and do startup testing of the
hardware as a standalone system (passing traffic, etc). Use the same
software image as Chassis 1.
Step 5. Connect the SFM interconnect cables and the CPM interconnect cables
between the two chassis.
If some ports on the node are to be used as synchronous ports for
frequency distribution then connect the BITS ports based on the presence
or absence of a BITS device as shown in Figure 106, or Figure 107. If using
the configuration shown in Figure 107, then the node must be configured to
use the internal-clock as the source for the BITS output. This ensures the
same frequency used by the master chassis is available to the extension
chassis.
Step 6. Run diagnostics to ensure all interconnect cabling is operating correctly:
Check the output of show card A detail and show card B detail on both
Chassis 1 and Chassis 2. The CPM interconnect ports should all have an
operational status of invalid-connection since the system expects to find
Chassis 2 at the far end. This indicates that the cables are working, but the
system does not yet know if the connections are operational until Chassis 2
is booted as an extension chassis. If the error code says no-link (while
Chassis 2 is still a standalone) then there is a problem; possibly bad cables,
ports, or CPM cards.
Check the SFM interconnect links using the sfm-interco-test tool
command.
Step 7. If some ports on the node are to be used as synchronous ports for
frequency distribution, then configure timing on Chassis 2 to use the BITS
ports as input and verify that good inputs are being received using the show
system sync-if-timing (standby) command.
Step 8. Do not continue with the procedure unless all CPM interconnect ports, SFM
interconnect ports, and, Sync (if required) are in operational state.
Step 9. Use the tools perform chassis set-role extension command on
Chassis 2 to set it to an extension chassis. Chassis 2 will reboot and wait
for the CPM on the master chassis to boot the Chassis 2 cards (including
the extension CPMs). The CF3 cards must be equipped on the CCMs of
Chassis 2.

Installation Guide
Step 10.On Chassis 1, check the output of show card A detail and show card B
detail:
Inter Chassis CPM Interconnect
CPM Interconnect Port 1
Oper State : up
SFF Status : operational
CPM Interconnect Port 2
Oper State : up
SFF Status : operational
The CPM interconnect ports should all indicate up. This indicates that the
system is aware that all the CPM interconnect cables are working and
connected to the right CPM interconnect ports.
Continue with the procedure only if all CPM interconnect ports are up.
Step 11.On Chassis 1, configure the Chassis 2 SFMs, XCMs, and XMAs.
Note that this could have been done anytime in this procedure, or even
before you started this migration procedure, but should be done before the
role of Chassis 1 is changed to master chassis. Perform an admin save so
the configuration is persistent after Chassis 1 is converted to the master
chassis in a subsequent step.
Chassis 1 is still in 7950 XRS-20e mode:
*A:myNode# show chassis
=========================================================================
System Information
=========================================================================
Name : my node
Type : 7950 XRS-20e
Chassis Topology : Standalone
...
Number of slots : 20
Oper number of slots : 12
...
Base MAC address : ac:9f:ff:00:00:00
=========================================================================
Chassis Summary
=========================================================================
Chassis Role Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Standalone Up
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 1
=========================================================================
Step 12.Switch Chassis 1 to master mode

*A:bksim3107# tools perform chassis set-role master
At this point in the procedure, expected system performance depends on
the SR OS Release running on the system:
a. If the system is running SR OS Release 13.0 or earlier, the system will
reboot and come up in XRS-40 mode:

Installation Guide

==========================================================================
System Information
=========================================================================
Name : my node
Type : 7950 XRS-20e
Chassis Topology : Extended (XRS-40)
...
...
==========================================================================
Chassis Summary
==========================================================================
Chassis Role Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 XRS-40 Master Up
2 XRS-40 Extension Up
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 2
==========================================================================
b. If the system is running SR OS Release 14.0 or later, the system will

come up in XRS-40 mode without rebooting; if the criteria stipulated in
section 14.1.1 are met.
==========================================================================
System Information
==========================================================================
Name : my node
Type : 7950 XRS-20e
Chassis Topology : in-migration (XRS-20->40)
...
...
==========================================================================
Chassis Summary
==========================================================================
Chassis Role Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 XRS-40 Master Up
2 XRS-40 Extension Up
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total: 2
==========================================================================

Installation Guide
14.1.1 Criteria for Migrating 7950 XRS-20e to 7950 XRS-40

For in-service migration to work with SR OS Release 14.0 or later, verify the following
conditions are met:
• The SFM and CPM cables are connected properly by physically looking at
them and by running the tools command to check the connectivity.
Note: The master chassis will complete XRS-40 migration even if the SFM cabling is not
complete and/or there are cabling errors. This can impact the bandwidth of the system and
cause a system reboot.
• All CPMs are present on both the designated master chassis and extension
chassis and that all required (4 x QSFP cables) are appropriately connected.
• The CPMs on the extension chassis must be reachable from the active and
standby CPMs on the master chassis.
• The extension chassis SFMs are provisioned before running the set-role
master tools command.
Note: The master chassis will complete XRS-40 migration even if the SFMs on the
extension chassis are not provisioned, which could reduce the effective bandwidth available
on the master chassis.
• When SFMs are brought up, a 60s timeout is used. If the SFM is not fully up,
that SFM is skipped and the next SFM will be processed.
• On the master chassis, the standby CPM has the same version of software.
When running the set-role master tools command to set the role of the designated
chassis as the master chassis, if any of the required criteria for in-service migration
are not met, such as CPM interconnections not being up a message indicating that
in-service migration is not possible is displayed along with the under-lying reason. At
this point you have the choice of stopping the migration to fix the issue or forcing the
7950 XRS-40 migration by rebooting the system:
tools perform chassis set-role master

WARNING: You are about to provision the chassis as an XRS-40 Master
Chassis and start the migration to XRS-40.
Do you wish to proceed (y/n) y
In-service migration could not be started due to the following:

<here the under-lying condition preventing in-service migration is listed>

Installation Guide
Please address the conditions listed above and reissue the tools command.
You can force migration to XRS-40 by choosing to reboot the chassis now.
This will set the chassis as Master and force the migration to XRS-40 by rebooting the
chassis.
Do you want to reboot now to force migration to XRS-40 (y/n):
Once all SFMs in Chassis 2 are brought up, the show sfm command should display
as follows:
*A:myxrs40# show sfm ic-mode
===============================================================================
SFM Switching Mode
===============================================================================
Slot Operational Oper Interconnect Admin Interconnect
State Mode Mode
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 up extended (XRS-40) extended (XRS-40)
…
16 up extended (XRS-40) extended (XRS-40)
14.1.2 Reverting to Separate 7950 XRS-20e Routers

To revert from a 7950 XRS-40 router to two separate 7950 XRS-20e routers, follow
these steps.
Step 1. Switch Chassis 1 (master) to standalone mode

*A:XRS-1# tools perform chassis set-role standalone
WARNING: You are about to provision all chassis as XRS-20 standalone
chassis. The chassis will immediately reboot after the command is
executed and attempt to boot up as standalone systems.
Do you wish to proceed (y/n)?
Step 2. Type Y
At this point in the procedure, expected system performance depends on
whether the CPM connections between 7950 XRS-40 master and
extension chassis are intact or not.
Step 3. If the extension chassis has communication with the master chassis, each
chassis will come up as a standalone 7950 XRS-20e chassis.

Installation Guide
Step 4. If the extension chassis has lost communication with the master chassis, on
the console of either extension CPM (C or D) switch Chassis 2 to
standalone:
set-role standalone
Total Memory: 16GB Chassis Type: xrs20_r2 (0x9) Card Type: sapphire_t3_r2
(0x5d) Git: [Tag/Hash: TiMOS_0_0_I4674; branch: master, remote: master]
TiMOS-L-0.0.I4674 boot/hops Nokia? 7xxx Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Nokia.
All rights reserved. All use subject to applicable license agreements.
Built on Wed Jan 6 18:31:53 PST 2016 by builder in /rel0.0/I4674/panos/main
TiMOS BOOT LOADER
Extended checks enabled with overhead of 36B
Set 2943 BSS fences on 512 KB (9 skipped)
Fair scheduler is now enabled
Time from clock is THU FEB 25 18:49:50 2016 UTC
Switching serial output to sync mode... done
INFO: This chassis is designated as an Extension chassis in an XRS-40 system.
Waiting for code download from the Master chassis to continue booting.
Type: set-role standalone and hit ENTER if you wish to change this chassis
to a standalone chassis and reboot. Only perform this step on one CPM/CCM
(not both).
7 secs ->
8 secs -> set-role standalone
Changing this chassis to a standalone chassis
Resetting...OK
14.2 System Boot-up

This section describes the sequence of events during 7950 XRS-40 bootup.
1. The CPMs in Chassis 2 detect their location in Chassis 2. The bootrom loads
boot.ldr from CF3.
2. The boot.ldr brings up the CPM interconnect ports and waits for the active
CPM in Chassis 1.
If the QSFP cables are not plugged in when the extension chassis reboots,
the extension chassis remains in boot.ldr wait-state. If the cables are
plugged in after this operation, the system will continue trying to fully bootup
the extension chassis without success.
Also see section 14.3.
3. The CPMs in Chassis 1 detect their location in Chassis 1 and boot normally
(boot.ldr on the CF and then load configurations from the CF, or a remote
location).

Installation Guide
4. At this point, the active CPM in Chassis 1 cannot detect that the Chassis 2
SFMs or line cards are present, but it can detect the presence of the CPMs
in Chassis 2.
5. The active CPM in Chassis 1 downloads software images to the following
cards and initializes them:
− XCMs in Chassis 1
− SFMs in Chassis 1
− CPMs in Chassis 2
6. Chassis 1 takes the SFM interconnect links out of line-loopback mode.
7. The 7950 XRS-40 can now pass traffic, but only by way of line cards on
Chassis 1 and with 50% fabric capacity.
8. Once the CPMs in Chassis 2 have loaded an image (from the active CPM in
Chassis 1), the extension chassis CPMs perform initialization and local
chassis management operations as well as communication relay functions.
9. The active CPM in Chassis 1 can now communicate with the SFMs and line
cards in Chassis 2. An inter-chassis SFM cabling test is run to ensure that the
cables are properly connected.
10. The active CPM in Chassis 1 downloads SR OS images to the line cards in
Chassis 2 and then initializes the cards.
11. The 7950 XRS-40 is now up and at full capacity.

Installation Guide
14.3 Recovery of an Isolated Extension Chassis

When a CPM boots up in an extension chassis (and is waiting to boot) the following
message displays to the console:
INFO: This chassis is designated as an extension chassis in an XRS-40 system. Waiting

for code download from the master chassis to continue booting. Type
set-role standalone
and hit ENTER if you wish to change this chassis to a standalone chassis and reboot.
Only perform this step on one CPM/CCM (not both).
Doing this writes to the backplane EEPROM to make the chassis a standalone
chassis and reboots the entire system.
Once the CPM is actually booting (getting code from the active CPM), the recovery
command will no longer be accepted and the following message displays:
Command can no longer be entered. Booting ......

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis LEDs
Installation Guide
15 LEDs
• CCM LEDs, section 15.1
• CPM LEDs, section 15.2
• SFM LEDs, section 15.3
• XCM LED, section 15.4
• C-XMA/XMA LEDs, section 15.5
• APEQ LEDs, section 15.6
• PCM LEDs, section 15.7
• Fan Tray LEDs, section 15.8
• PCM Fan LED, section 15.9

LEDs 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
15.1 CCM LEDs

Figure 109 CCM LEDs
G
D B
C
E
H hw0131
Table 83 CCM LEDs
Key Label Reference
A Status (standalone/master) Table 84

Status (extension) Table 85
B OT (Over Temperature) Table 86
C Alarms
Critical/Major Table 87
Minor Table 88
D OES Table 89
E Sync-E/1588 Reserved for future use.
F Mgmt Table 90
G BITS Table 91
H CF Status Table 92

Installation Guide
15.1.1 Status LED
Table 84 Standalone/Master Status LED Behavior
Color/State Description
Blue (solid) CCM is powered on

Green (slow blink) CCM is loading firmware and running diagnostics
Green (solid) CCM has completed the boot/load process and is
operational as the active CCM
Green (rapid blink) CCM has completed the boot/load process and is
operational as the standby CCM
Table 85 Extension Status LED Behavior
Blue (solid) CCM is powered on

Magenta (slow blink) CCM is loading firmware and running diagnostics
Magenta (solid) CCM has completed the boot/load process and is
operational as the extension-active CCM
Magenta (rapid blink) CCM has completed the boot/load process and is
operational as the extension-standby CCM
15.1.2 Temperature LED
Table 86 Temp LED Behavior
Red (solid) Over-temperature condition exists

Installation Guide
15.1.3 Critical/Major Alarm LEDs
Table 87 Critical/Major Alarm LED Behavior
Red (solid) Serious condition exists, such as:

• severe over-temperature
• fan tray failure
• over-current or out-of-tolerance voltage
condition in an APEQ
Unlit No alarm detected
15.1.4 Minor Alarm LEDs
Table 88 Minor Alarm LE Behavior
Amber (solid) Marginal condition exists, such as:

• severe over-temperature
• fan tray failure
• over-current or out-of-tolerance voltage
condition in an APEQ
Unlit No alarm detected
15.1.5 OES Ports LEDs
Table 89 OES Port LED Behavior
Port Color/State Description
Link Green (solid) Valid link established

Unlit Port currently unused

Installation Guide
Table 89 OES Port LED Behavior (Continued)
Fault Amber (solid) Link fault detected or link down

Amber (blink) Packet error RX and Tx
Unlit No fault
15.1.6 Management Port LEDs
Table 90 Management Port LED Behavior
Link Green (solid) 1000 Mb/s

Green (rapid solid) 100 Mb/s
Green (slow solid) 10 Mb/s
Unlit Port disabled, shut down, or
operationally down
Fault Amber (solid) Link fault detected or link down
Amber (blink) Packet error on RX and Tx
Unlit No fault
15.1.7 BITS Port LEDs
Table 91 BITS Port LED Behavior
Ref Green (solid) Qualified and selected as BITS clock

reference input
Green (blink) Qualified and set as the standby BITS
clock reference
Unlit BITS port disabled, shut down, or not
configured

Installation Guide
Table 91 BITS Port LED Behavior (Continued)
Fault Amber (solid) Reference enabled and has attempted

to become the reference clock, but LOS
condition exists
Amber (blink) Enabled, but error frames received or
error condition exists
Unlit • Reference is enabled, qualified,
and operating normally
• Disabled, shut down, or not
configured
15.1.8 CF Status LEDs
Table 92 CF Status LED Behavior
Drive Color/State Description
NV (CF1) Green (solid) Normal operational, read/write activity

Amber (blink) Error condition exists
Amber (solid) CF operationally down
CF2, CF3 Green (solid) CF operational, read/write activity
Amber (blink) Error condition exists
Amber (solid) CF operationally down
Unlit CF not installed in slot

Installation Guide
15.2 CPM LEDs

Figure 110 CPM LEDs
A
B hw0132
Table 93 Standalone/Master CPM LED Behavior
Key Label Color/State Description
A Status Blue (solid) Card is powered on

Green (slow blink) Loading firmware and running CPU diagnostics
Green (solid) Boot/load process complete and is operational as the
active CPM
Green (rapid blink) Boot/load process complete and is operational as the
standby CPM
B Link/Act Green (solid) Optics installed, valid communications link is
established, and port is up
Green (blink) Optics installed, valid communications link is
established, port up and passing traffic
Amber (rapid blink) QSFP mis-cabled
Amber (slow blink) Port is enabled, but optics not installed, or optics from
non-approved vendor
Amber (solid) Optics installed, but no link present or LOS
Amber (blink-1/sec) Packet error on Rx and Tx
Unlit Port is not enabled (shut down)

Installation Guide
Table 94 Extension CPM LED Behavior

Magenta (slow blink) Loading firmware and running CPU diagnostics
Magenta (solid) Boot/load process complete and is operational as the
extension-active CPM
Magenta (rapid blink) Boot/load process complete and is operational as the
extension-standby CPM
B Link/Act Green (solid) Optics installed, valid communications link is
established, and port is up
Green (blink) Optics installed, valid communications link is
established, port up and passing traffic
Amber (rapid blink) Optics from a non-approved vendor
Amber (slow blink) Port is enabled, but optics not installed, or mis-cabled
Unlit Port is not enabled (shut down)

Installation Guide
15.3 SFM LEDs
15.3.1 Standalone SFM LED

Figure 111 Standalone SFM LEDs
Status
A hw0133
Table 95 Standalone SFM LED Behavior

Green (slow blink) Loading firmware and running diagnostics.
Green (solid) • Boot/load process complete
• Operationally and administratively up
Amber Card failure

Installation Guide
15.3.2 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LEDs

Figure 112 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LEDs
B C
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Lnk/
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Act
Cable ID
Status
A hw0110
Table 96 Multi-chassis Capable SFM LED Behavior

Green (slow blink) Loading firmware and running diagnostics
Green (solid) Boot/load process complete, operationally and
administratively up
Amber Card failure
B Cable ID Green (solid) Correct cabling and valid communication link
established on all links within the SFM
Amber (solid) At least one of the SFM ports has either cables not
connected to the correct SFM port on the other end,
has wrong vendor optics or has no link present, or
optics not present in some of the ports
Unlit No optics present in any of the ports within the SFM
C Lnk/Act Green (solid) Valid communications link established
Amber (slow blink) CXP not cabled properly – not connected to the right
port on the other end
Amber (rapid blink) Optics from a non-approved vendor
Amber (solid) Optics installed from approved vendor, but no link
present, or LOS
Unlit No optics present, Laser disabled

Installation Guide
15.4 XCM LED

Figure 113 XCM LED
A
hw0078
Table 97 XCM LED Behavior

Green (slow blink) • Loading firmware and running diagnostics
• Fully booted, but not provisioned
Green (solid) • Boot/load process complete
• Operationally and administratively up
Amber (solid) Fault condition

Installation Guide
15.5 C-XMA/XMA LEDs

Beginning in SR OS R15.1.R5/R16.0.R1, LED indicators are divided into two types,
depending on the connector configuration. A connector in this context is defined as
a physical port equipped with an optical transceiver that can be configured with any
one of the following optics: 1x100 GE, 2x40 GE, 1X40 GE, 4x10 GE, and 10x10 GE.
Breakout does not apply to the 1x100 GE or the 1x40 GE.
• LED behavior for connectors configured for a single-port are described in

LEDs for Single-port Connectors, section 15.5.1.
• LED behavior for connectors configured for multi-port breakout are described
in LEDs for Multi-port Breakout Connectors, section 15.5.2.
In this configuration, the Lnk (link) LED features a blink sequence that is used
to identify issues or fault condition for each port within a connector.
15.5.1 LEDs for Single-port Connectors

Table 98 describes the LED behavior for single-port connectors.
Table 98 C-XMA/XMA Single-Port LEDs Behavior
A Link/Act Green (solid) Valid communications link established

Green (blink) Port active and receiving or transmitting data
Amber (rapid blink) Loopback
Amber (slow blink) Administratively up, but no optic module installed
Unlit Laser disabled or port shut down

Installation Guide
Table 98 C-XMA/XMA Single-Port LEDs Behavior (Continued)
B Status Green (blink) Loading firmware and running diagnostics

Green (solid) • Successfully completed bring-up/diagnostics
• Operationally up
• Administratively up
Amber (solid) • Operationally down
Unlit • Operationally down
• Administratively down
15.5.2 LEDs for Multi-port Breakout Connectors

Table 99 describes the LED behavior for multi-port breakout connectors.
Table 99 XMA Multi-Port Breakout LEDs Behavior
A Link/Act Green (solid) All ports within the connector have a communication link
established
Amber (slow blink) Administratively up, but no optic module installed or optic
module not properly inserted.
Unlit Laser disabled or port shut down
Blink Sequence. At least one port not in loopback 1 has a link down condition.
See section 15.5.2.1.
Amber (solid) Individual port status will be displayed. Prepare to count
blinks and note the blink color. Duration 3 s.
Green (blink) The port is active and has a communication link established
or the port is disabled or shut down. Duration 0.75 s.
Amber (blink) No link is present. Duration 0.75 s.

Installation Guide
Table 99 XMA Multi-Port Breakout LEDs Behavior (Continued)
B Status Green (blink) Loading firmware and running diagnostics

Green (solid) • Successfully completed bring-up/diagnostics
• Operationally up
Amber (solid) • Operationally down
Unlit • Operationally down
• Administratively down
Notes:
1. For the purposes of the Lnk LED, a port in loopback is treated the same as a port with an
established communication link.
15.5.2.1 Blink Sequence
Multi-port connectors display a blink sequence on the Lnk (link) LED to identify an
issue or fault condition for each port within a connector. The Lnk LED blink sequence
occurs only when a break-out optic is installed and only if there is an issue with a port
in that connector. The sequence can be initiated by an issue such as a condition in
which an optic is installed but no link is present.
The blink sequence is as follows:
1. The link LED is solid amber for 2.75 s, indicating that a fault condition exists
on one of the ports of a multi-port group and that the blink sequence
identifying the state of each port is about to begin.
2. There follows a sequence of green or amber blinks, each with a duration of
0.75 s. The LED is unlit for 0.25 s between blinks. Each blink represents an
individual port in the multi-port group displayed in sequence beginning with
port 1 and ending with the last port of the multi-port group: port 1 to port 4 for
4x10 GE multi-port connectors, and port 1 to port 10 for 10x10 GE multi-port
connectors. The color of each blink indicates the port state:
− green meaning that the port is active and has a communication link
established or the port is disabled or shut down.
− amber meaning that there is no link present.

Installation Guide
Figure 114 shows an example of the Lnk (link) LED sequence for a 10x10 GE
multi-port connector when an issue or condition occurs on ports 3, 6, and 8.
Figure 114 Example: Port Indicators for 10x10 GE Breakout
2.75 s Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 Port 9 Port 10
Legend:
2.75 s Solid Amber
0.75 s Blink Green
0.75 s Blink Amber
27470
3. After the last port blink, the LED is unlit for 0.25 s. The sequence repeats until
all issues and conditions for all ports are rectified.
When the issue or condition with the port or ports is rectified, the Lnk LED is lit solid
green unless another issue or condition is present. If an issue or condition is cleared
during the display of the sequence, the sequence completes for all ports, then the
Lnk LED turns solid green.
If the Lamp Test (LT) is initiated, the blink sequence is stopped and the LT test
behavior is presented. After the LT completes, the system software performs a new
evaluation of the status of the multi-port connector and the Lnk (link) LED displays
either solid green or another blink sequence.
If local troubleshooting does not clear the amber blinks, further investigation must be
conducted using the CLI. The CLI presents the condition for the problem ports as a
port disabled or shut down, optics installed but no link present, or no activity.

Installation Guide
15.6 APEQ LEDs

Table 100 describes APEQ LED behavior.
Table 100 APEQ LED Behavior
Key Model Label Color/State Description
A All Status/ Blue (solid) Power on

Stat.
Blue (slow blink) Not enough active APEQs recognized
for system start
Green (slow blink) • APEQs attempting
communication with each other
or Standby
• LED blinks green until active
CPM is communicating with
APEQs
Green (rapid blink) Changing operational mode
Green (solid) Normal operational
Amber/Green • APEQ operating at half power
(alternating blink) • Loss of one power feed
NOTE: APEQ-DC-
4275 only
Red (slow blink) There are no recognized fan trays in the
system
Unlit APEQ not seated

Installation Guide
Table 100 APEQ LED Behavior (Continued)
Key Model Label Color/State Description
B APEQ-DC-2200/ 80A Green (solid) APEQ is configured for 80A operation.

2800; Figure 116
APEQ-AC-4400; L1 Green (solid) Input within safety rating
Figure 119
Amber (solid) Input outside safety rating, but within
operating specifications
Red (solid) Input outside operating specifications
Unlit No input power
APEQ-HVDC-4400; L1 Green (solid) Input within safety rating
Figure 120 Red (solid) Input outside operating specifications
Red (momentary When power is first applied to the APEQ
blink) before switching to solid green
When power is removed from the APEQ
before switching to unlit
C APEQ-AC-4400; L2 Green (solid) Input within safety rating
Figure 119
Amber (solid) Input outside safety rating, but within
operating specifications
Red (solid) Input outside operating specifications
APEQ-HVDC-4400; L2 Green (solid) Input within safety rating
Figure 120 Red (solid) Input outside operating specifications
Red (momentary When power is first applied to the APEQ
blink) before switching to solid green
When power is removed from the APEQ
before switching to unlit

Installation Guide
Figure 115 APEQ-DC-4275
hw0283
Figure 116 APEQ-DC-2200/2800 LEDs
hw0113
Figure 117 APEQ-HVDC-3000 LED
hw0114

Installation Guide
Figure 118 APEQ-AC-3000 LED
A Stat.
APEQ-AC-3000
hw0115
Figure 119 APEQ-AC-4400 LEDs
A
B
C
hw0486
Figure 120 APEQ-HVDC-4400 LEDs
A
B
C
hw0656

Installation Guide
15.7 PCM LEDs
15.7.1 Dual PCM LEDs

The Dual PCM has two LEDs; one for feed A and one for feed B, which simply
indicate that the input power is within the valid range of 40V to 72V. When input
voltages are higher than 72V, the LEDs will be unlit; however, power will be present.
Figure 121 Dual PCM LEDs
A B
hw0151
Table 101 Dual PCM LED Behavior
A A (feed) Green (solid) Feed A input voltage valid

Unlit Feed A input voltage NOT valid
B B (feed) Green (solid) Feed B input voltage valid
Unlit Feed B input voltage NOT valid

Installation Guide
15.7.2 Quad PCM LEDs

The Quad PCM has four LEDs; one for feed A and one for feed B, which simply
indicate that the input power is within the valid range of 40V to 72V. When input
voltages are higher than 72V, the LEDs will be unlit; however, power will be present.
Figure 122 Quad PCM LEDs

A
B D
C E
hw0280
Table 102 Quad PCM LED Behavior
A Status Green (slow blink) Power On or PCM attempting to

communicate with mating PIM.
Green (solid) Normal Operating Condition
Amber (solid) Fault Condition
Unlit PCM not seated
B A (feed) Green (solid) Feed A input voltage valid
Unlit Feed A input voltage NOT valid
C B2 (feed) Green (solid) Feed B2 input voltage valid
Unlit Feed B2 input voltage NOT valid
D B (feed) Green (solid) Feed B input voltage valid
Unlit Feed B input voltage NOT valid
E A2 (feed) Green (solid) Feed A2 input voltage valid
Unlit Feed A2 input voltage NOT valid

Installation Guide
15.8 Fan Tray LEDs

Figure 123 Fan Tray Status LED
hw0079
Note: Early versions of the fan tray may have a different legend, but the LED behavior is
consistent with that listed in Table 103.
Table 103 Fan Status LED Behavior
Key Color/State Description
A Blue Power on
Green (solid) Normal operation
Green (blinking) Local control
Off Safe to remove fan tray
B — Legend

Installation Guide
15.8.1 Ring LED

In addition to the Fan Status LED, there is also a blue LED ring around the push
button switch on each impeller fan tray.
After the push button is pushed and held for 3 seconds, the blue ring flashes for 4
seconds during which power is removed from the fans, then it turns off (Fan Status
LED also turns off) to indicate it is safe to remove the impeller fan tray.
15.9 PCM Fan LED

Figure 124 shows the location of the PCM fan LED.
Figure 124 PCM Fan LED
hw0280
Table 100 describes APEQ LED behavior.
Table 104 PCM Fan LED Behavior
Key Color/State Description
A Green (solid) Normal operation

Off Safe to remove PCM fan

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Field-Replaceable Units
Installation Guide
16 Field-Replaceable Units
• Air Filters, section 16.1
• CPMs, section 16.2
• SFMs, section 16.3
• C-XMAs/XMAs, section 16.4
• XCMs, section 16.5
• APEQs, section 16.6
• PIMs and PCMs, section 16.7
• Impeller Fan Trays, section 16.8
• PCM Fans, section 16.9
• CCMs, section 16.10
• Cable Guides, section 16.11
• Protection Panels, section 16.12
Warning: Before starting any maintenance on the system, make sure you are wearing an
approved ESD strap and it is attached to an ESD chassis grounding plug; see Figure 125.
Avoid touching printed circuit boards, components, and connector pins.
hw0051

Field-Replaceable Units 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
16.1 Air Filters

The system has four serviceable air filters:
• Removing and Replacing the CCM Air Filter, section 16.1.1

• Removing and Replacing the XCM Air Filter, section 16.1.2
• Removing and Replacing the Main System Air Filter, section 16.1.3
• Removing and Replacing the APEQ Air Filter, section 16.1.4
Nokia recommends inspecting the air filters on a monthly basis. If dirt and dust
accumulation are found, schedule a maintenance task to remove and replace the air
filters.
16.1.1 Removing and Replacing the CCM Air Filter

Figure 126 Removing the Air Filter Drawer
hw0062

Installation Guide

Step 2. Lift up the hinged cover.
Step 3. Use the tab at the bottom of the triangle to remove the filter element.
Step 4. Remove any residual dust and debris from the intake area.
Step 5. Unpack the replacement filter element from the protective packaging.
Step 6. Push the new filter element onto the two pins.
NOTE: The plastic flex-frame should be facing inward.
Step 7. Push tabs around perimeter of the filter in the cable manager slot above.
Step 8. Close the cover.
16.1.2 Removing and Replacing the XCM Air Filter

Figure 127 Removing the XCM Air Filter
hw0064

Installation Guide

Step 2. Pull the filter away from the frame.
It is held in place with magnets.
Step 3. Remove any residual dust and debris from the intake area.
Step 4. Unpack the replacement filter element from the protective packaging.
Step 5. Mount the new filter.
16.1.3 Removing and Replacing the Main System Air Filter

The main system air filter drawer is accessible from the rear of the chassis as shown
in Figure 128.
Figure 128 Removing the Air Filter Drawer
hw0059

Installation Guide
Table 105 Filter Drawer Features
Key Description
A Captive screws
B Filter vent faceplate
C Filter element
16.1.3.1 Removing the Air Filter Drawer

Step 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the air filter
drawer.
Step 3. Remove the air filter drawer and place it on a flat surface.
16.1.3.2 Removing and Replacing the Filter Element
Figure 129 Removing the Filter Element
hw0060

Installation Guide

Step 2. Snap open the top cover of the air filter drawer and swing it to the open
position.
Step 3. Pull the edges of the filter element to release it from the drawer.
Step 4. Remove any residual dust and debris from the drawer.
Step 5. Unpack the replacement filter element from the protective packaging and
place on the open drawer.
The foam filter is attached to a stiff, plastic flex-frame.
Step 6. Place the filter element in the drawer with the plastic flex-frame on the
bottom side.
Step 7. Correctly position the filter element in the drawer using the alignment tabs
as shown in Figure 130.
Figure 130 Correctly Positioning the Filter in the Upgrade Drawer
hw0061
Confirm that the plastic flex-frame aligns with the ribs on the bottom metal
frame of the drawer when in the closed position.
Step 8. Push down on the edges of the air filter element to secure it to the drawer.

Installation Guide
Step 9. Close and secure the top cover.

Step 10.Replace the air filter drawer in the chassis.
Step 11.note the date of replacement on the main system air filter drawer.
16.1.4 Removing and Replacing the APEQ Air Filter

The APEQ air filter is located on the APEQ access panel assembly (A).
Figure 131 APEQ Access Panel and Filter
hw0045

Step 2. Locate the APEQ filter pull tab on the left or right side of the filter element.
Pull the tab to remove the filter element.
Step 3. Remove any residual dust and debris from the access panel.
Step 4. Unpack the replacement air filter element from the protective packaging and
place on the access panel.
Step 5. Push down on all four of the edges of the air filter element to secure in the
access bezel. The filter element has a plastic frame with tabs around the
perimeter. These tabs must be securely snapped into place within the
APEQ bezel frame.
Step 6. Place the dirty filter element into the protective bag for transport. Discard the
dirty element.
Step 7. Mount the access panel.

Installation Guide
16.2 CPMs
Warning:
• Do not remove a CPM if a compact flash LED on the corresponding CCM indicates
read/write activity.
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle cards. Always wear
an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap connected to the grounding plug on the front or
rear of the chassis.
Note:
General:
• When replacing CPMs, configuration modifications are not required.

• All routers require two CPMs for redundancy.
• When you remove a CPM, always use the ejector levers to make sure that the
connector pins disconnect from the midplane.
• Removing a CPM in a non-redundant system causes the system to shut down.
• Each CPM has two ejector levers which seat and release the card from the midplane
connectors. During installation, the ejector levers must be positioned outward and
rotated inward to insert the CPM into the mid-plane.
7950 XRS:
• Accommodates two CPMs, one active and one standby.

• The CPMs must be installed in outboard slots A or B.
• XRS CPM (3HE07116AA) has 8GB of memory. Recently a 16GB version of the XRS
CPM (3HE07116AB) has been introduced. A mixed configuration of 8GB CPM as active
and 16GB CPM as standby is supported during upgrade. However, continuous
operation of such configuration is not supported. A major alarm will be raised when such
a mixed CPM configuration is present.

Installation Guide
16.2.1 Removing and Replacing CPMs

Figure 132 Removing and Replacing a CPM
A
B
hw0052
Key Description
A Slot guide
B CPM positioned in the slot guide
C CPM captive screw
D Ejector lever

Installation Guide

Step 1. Loosen the CPM captive screws.
Step 2. Use a wire to press the reset button for a short time.
All LEDs, except the power LED, will turn off.
Step 3. When the LEDs turn off, simultaneously rotate the ejector levers outward to
unlock the CPM and immediately pull the CPM out of the slot at least 2 in.
(5 cm) to disengage the connection to the mid-plane.
Caution: Do not wait longer than one minute to remove the CPM after the LEDs have
turned off, which is approximately the time it takes for the module to reboot.
Step 4. Disconnect all cables from the CPM front panel.

Step 5. Remove the CPM from the system.
Step 6. Place the CPM on an anti-static surface or in an anti-static bag.
Step 7. Remove the new CPM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed circuit
board or connector pins.
Step 8. Rotate ejectors to fully open position.
Step 9. Insert the card into card cage until the ejectors stop against the upper and
lower rails.
partial contact with the midplane connectors. Permanent deformation of the ejector tang
may result.
Step 10.Release the ejectors and push against the faceplate. The ejectors will rotate
as the card is inserted.
Step 11.Once the ejectors have rotated, seat the card by pushing against the ejector
handles.
Step 12.Secure the card in place by tightening the captive screws to a torque of
32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).

Installation Guide
16.3 SFMs
Warning:
Note:
General:
• When replacing SFMs, configuration modifications are not required.

• All routers require eight SFMs; 7 + 1 for redundancy.
• When you remove a SFM, always use the ejector levers to make sure that the connector
pins disconnect from the midplane.
• Removing a SFM in a non-redundant system configuration causes the system to
attempt a recovery as per minimum requirements; see section 9.2.2.
• Each SFM module has two ejector levers that seat and release the card from the
midplane connectors. During installation, the ejector levers must be positioned outward
and then rotated inward to insert the CPM into the mid-plane.
7950 XRS:
• Accommodates eight SFMs, seven active and one redundant.

• The SFMs must be installed in board slots 1 through 8.

Installation Guide
16.3.1 Removing and Replacing SFMs

Figure 133 Removing and Replacing an SFM
A
B
hw0053
Table 107 SFM Features
Key Description
A Slot guide
B SFM positioned in the slot guide
C SFM captive screw
D Ejector lever

Step 2. Loosen the SFM captive screws.

Installation Guide
Step 3. Simultaneously, rotate the ejector levers outward to unlock the panel.
Step 4. Pull the card out of the slot. Place on an anti-static surface or in an anti-static
bag.
Step 5. Remove the new SFM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed circuit
board or connector pins.
Step 6. The SFM must be installed in rear chassis slots 1 through 8.
Step 7. Rotate ejectors to fully open position.
Step 8. Insert the card into card cage until the ejectors stop against the upper and
lower rails.
partial contact with the midplane connectors. Permanent deformation of the ejector tang
may result.
Step 9. Release the ejectors and push against the faceplate. The ejectors will rotate
as the card is inserted.
Step 10.Once the ejectors have rotated, seat the card by pushing against the ejector
handles.
Step 11.Secure the card in place by tightening the captive screws to a torque of
32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).

Installation Guide
16.4 C-XMAs/XMAs
Caution:
• The XCMs have a large physical form factor, and are very heavy when loaded with C-
XMA/XMA.
• To reduce the risk of injury, remove cards prior to removing the associated XCM.
Warning:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if you mishandle FRUs. Always wear
an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD strap to the
grounding plug on the front of the chassis.
• Invisible laser radiation can be emitted from the aperture ports of a C-XMA /XMA when
no cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.
• Always place components on an anti-static surface.
• Use only approved small form factor pluggables (SFPs or CFPs) in C-XMA/XMA ports.
Note:
• If you shut down or remove the last operational C-XMA/XMA, the associated XCM
reboots and remains in the boot state until at least one C-XMA/XMA is operational on
the XCM.
• If you are replacing the C-XMA/XMA with the same card-type, you do not need to
remove the associated configuration.
• If you are replacing the C-XMA/XMA with a different card-type, you must remove all
associated configurations; such as ports, connectors and services, prior to extracting
the card from the chassis. You must also change the configuration to reflect the new
card type prior to the installation.
Refer to 7950 SR OS Interfaces Guide for information on configuring cards, C-XMA/
XMA, and ports.
• Before you insert the new C-XMA/XMA into the chassis, configure the new card-type
and then re-configure all associated configurations, such as ports, connectors, and
services.
• An XMA cannot be provisioned in the system unless the available power is adequate to
accommodate these cards when made operational; see section 4.5.

Installation Guide
16.4.1 Shutting Down and Modifying Card Configuration
Enter the following commands in the config context to shut down ports and remove
the C-XMA/XMA from the configuration.
CLI Syntax: config

port port-id
shutdown
card slot-number
mda mda-slot
shutdown
exit
no mda mda-slot
card slot-number
card-type card-type
no shutdown
mda mda-slot
mda-type mda-type
no shutdown
exit
Shut down every port on the C-XMA:
Example: ALA-1>config# port 1/1/1

ALA-1>config>port# shutdown
ALA-1>config# port 1/1/2
...
Shut down the XCM (card) and C-XMA (MDA):

ALA-1>config>card>mda# shutdown

Installation Guide
Remove the C-XMA and card from the configuration:
Example: ALA-1>config>card# no mda 1
Use the following command syntax to reconfigure the card, MDA, and port
configurations:

ALA-1>config>card# card-type xcm-x20e
ALA-1>config>card# no shutdown
ALA-1>config>card>mda# mda-type cx20-10g-sfp
ALA-1>config>card>mda# no shutdown

Installation Guide
16.4.2 Removing and Replacing C-XMA

Figure 134 Removing and Replacing C-XMA
hw0057
Table 108 C-XMA Features
Key Description
A C-XMA slot guides

B Threaded receptacle
C Mechanical Adapter
D C-XMA

Installation Guide
16.4.3 Removing and Replacing XMA

Figure 135 Removing and Replacing XMA
hw0058
Table 109 XMA Features
Key Description
A XMA slot guides

B Threaded receptacle
C XMA

Step 2. Disconnect all cables from the ports.
Step 3. Loosen the captive screws.

Installation Guide
Step 4. Locate the ejector levers for the C-XMA/XMA. Simultaneously rotate the
ejector levers inward to eject the C-XMA/XMA.
Step 5. Remove the card from the XCM slot.
Step 6. Place the card on an anti-static surface.
Step 7. You must either immediately install another card into the slot or replace the
card with an impedance panel.
Step 8. Remove the replacement card from the packaging and place it on a flat anti-
static work surface. Avoid touching board components and connector pins.
Step 9. Insert the card into the card slot on the XCM. Align the card with the slot
guides and the captive screw with the threaded receptacle.
Step 10.Tighten the captive screws to secure the card. Tighten to a torque of
10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).
Step 11.Check the Power LED.
Step 12.Attach cables to the ports.

Installation Guide
16.5 XCMs
Warning:
Note:
General:
• All routers require at least one XCM.

• When you remove an XCM, always use the ejector levers to make sure that the
connector pins disconnect from the midplane.
• Removing an XCM will not cause the system to shut down. If you are not immediately
installing a replacement XCM, replace the empty slot with an impedance panel.
7950 XRS:
• Accommodates a maximum of ten XCMs.

• An XCM cannot be provisioned in the system unless the available power is adequate to
accommodate these cards when made operational.
• The system supports a mix of FP3-based (XCM-X20e) XCMs with FP3-based XMAs in
any slot and FP4-based (XCM2-X20e) XCMs with FP4-based XMAs in any other slot.
• XCM-X20e XCMs do not support FP4-based XMAs.
• XCM2-X20e XCMs do not support FP3-based XMAs.
16.5.1 Shutting Down and Modifying Card Configuration

Installation Guide
Use the following command syntax in the config context.
CLI Syntax: config

port port-id
shutdown
card slot-number
shutdown
mda slot-number
shutdown
no mda slot-number
no card slot-number
Shutting down ports:
Example: ALA-1>config# port 1/1/1

...
Shutting down C-XMAs (cards):

ALA-1>config>card# shutdown
...
Shutting down C-XMAs (MDAs):
Example: ALA-1>config>card# mda 1

...
Removing C-XMAs (MDAs) and C-XMAs (cards) from the configuration:
Example: ALA-1>config>card# no mda 1

ALA-1>config>card# no mda 2
...
ALA-1>config# no card 1
...
Continue port configurations as required.

Installation Guide
16.5.2 Removing and Replacing XCMs
Note:
• The XCM air filter and frame must removed before the XCM can be removed.
• XCMs are hot swappable, but you cannot replace an XCM without affecting the C-XMA/
XMA connectivity.
• Before removing the XCM it is recommended that the XCM is shut down first. This
allows more graceful handling of removal of the XCM from service.

Step 2. Disconnect the network interface cables connected to the C-XMAs/XMAs.
Step 3. Remove each C-XMA/XMA independently before you remove the XCM,
see section 16.4.2.
Caution: Risk of Injury:
• The XCMs have a large physical form factor, and are very heavy when loaded with
C-XMAs/XMAs.
• To reduce the risk of injury, remove C-XMAs/XMAs prior to removing the associated
XCM.
Step 4. If you are not replacing the XCM, install a blank panel in the empty slot, use
a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws.
If you are replacing the XCM, proceed to section, section 16.5.2.2.

Installation Guide
16.5.2.1 Installing an Impedance Panel
Impedance panels (see Figure 29) are required in all empty card slots to prevent
excess dust accumulation and to help control airflow and electromagnetic
interference, and for safety reasons. These panels and face plates do not have board
components or connector pins.

Step 2. Align the panel and insert into the chassis slot.
Step 3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the 2 captive screws that fasten the
panel to the chassis. Tighten to a torque of 32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).
16.5.2.2 Replacing an XCMs
Figure 136 Replacing an XCM
hw0055

Installation Guide

Step 3. Remove the replacement XCM from the packaging. Do not touch the printed
circuit board and connector pins.
Step 4. Holding the XCM by the edges, rotate the ejector levers outward. The
ejector levers must be in this position to release the locking mechanism.
Step 5. Align the XCM with the slot guide and slide the XCM inward until the
connectors are seated with the midplane. The XCM ejector handles may be
rotated outward to help seat the XCM into the mid-plane.
Step 6. Rotate the ejector levers outward to lock the XCM in place.
If an XCM lever does not shift to the locked position, the XCM is not properly
seated. Rotate the levers outward and pull the XCM out halfway and then
try to reinsert it. Try again to shift the levers outward to the locked position.
Step 7. Secure into place by tightening the captive screws.
Step 8. Replace the XCM air filter and frame.
16.6 APEQs
Danger:
• Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace this equipment and
connect the power cables.
• You must use power cables which meet local electrical code requirements.
Warning:

• The router with APEQs should be installed only in restricted access area (such as
dedicated equipment room and electrical closet) in accordance with Articles 110-26 and
110-27 of the most recent National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage can occur if components are mishandled.
Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap and always connect an ESD strap
to the grounding plug on the front of the chassis.

Installation Guide
Note:
• For full redundancy, each APEQ should connect to its associated independent power
source on the power input and connection modules with a dedicated circuit breaker.
• To provision the APEQs that need to be deployed in the router; see section 4.3.
APEQs are located in the front power bay at the bottom of the chassis. There are
twelve slots as shown in Figure 137. APEQ slots are designated 1 through 12, top to
bottom and left to right; where slot 1 is top-left.
Figure 137 APEQ Slots
PE
Q
PE1
Q
PE5
Q
9
B PE
Q
PE4
Q
PE8
Q
12
C
A

hw0140
Table 110 APEQ Slots
Key Description
A Slot number guide

B APEQ
C Captive screw

Installation Guide
16.6.1 Removing and Replacing APEQs

You can remove and replace a single APEQ without affecting system operation.

Step 2. For APEQ-HVDC-3000, APEQ-AC-3000, APEQ-AC-4400 or APEQ-HVDC-
4400 modules, disconnect the power cords.
Step 3. For APEQ-DC-2200/2800 or APEQ-DC-4275 modules, use a Phillips
screwdriver to loosen the captive screws on the APEQ access panel.
Step 4. Pull the ejector lever to the open position. This releases the connection.
Step 5. Slide the APEQ out of the slot.
Step 6. Remove the replacement APEQ from the packaging.
Step 8. Open the ejector lever.
Step 9. Slide the APEQ into the slot until it makes contact with the connector.
Step 10.Push the APEQ ejector level to the closed position. This seats the connector
with the receptacle in the rear of the slot.
Step 11.Secure the APEQ into place by tightening the captive screw; torque to
10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).
Step 12.For AC APEQs, connect the power cord.
Step 13.Using the APEQ LED, verify APEQ status; see section 15.6.

Installation Guide
16.7 PIMs and PCMs

• Removing and Replacing PCMs, section 16.7.1
• Removing and Replacing PIMs, section 16.7.2
16.7.1 Removing and Replacing PCMs

You can remove and replace a single PCM without affecting system operation.
upwards. Any vacancies in the PCP slot positions are only supported for a short time to
support PIM or PCM maintenance. In this case, care must be taken not to block the air-flow
channel or leave a slot vacant because PCMs above this point may start to overheat.
Step 1. Turn off (open) all customer circuit breakers or fuses that protect the power
feeds to the PCM to be replaced.
Step 3. Unscrew the captives screws and use the handle to pull the PCM out of the
slot in the PIM.
Step 4. Remove the replacement PCM from the packaging and place it on a flat
anti-static work surface. Avoid touching board components and connector
pins.

Installation Guide
Step 5. Insert the PCM in the PIM slot and secure with the captive screws; torque
to 19 lbf·in (2.15 N·m).
hw0167
Step 6. Turn on (close) the customer circuit breaker or fuse that protects the power
feed to the replacement PCM.
Step 7. Check the feed LEDs on the PCM to verify that power is present: see
section 15.7.

Installation Guide
16.7.2 Removing and Replacing PIMs

You can remove and replace a single PIM without affecting system operation.
upwards. Any vacancies in the PCP slot positions are only supported for a short time to
support PIM or PCM maintenance. In this case, care must be taken not to block the air-flow
channel or leave a slot vacant because PCMs above this point may start to overheat.
Step 1. Turn off (open) the customer circuit breakers or fuses that protect the cables
being removed from the PIM.
Step 3. Unscrew the captives screws and use the handle to pull the PCM out of the
slot in the PIM and place it on a flat anti-static work surface. Avoid touching
board components and connector pins.
Step 4. Unscrew the captives screws and pull the PIM out to remove it from the slot.
Step 5. Remove the clear-plastic safety covers from the terminal blocks and set
aside.
Step 6. Disconnect all the input and return power cables.
Step 7. Remove the PIM and place it on a flat anti-static work surface.
Step 8. Remove the replacement PIM from the packaging and place it on a flat anti-
static work surface. Avoid touching board components and connector pins.
Step 9. Insert the new PIM in the PCP slot, but don’t push it all the way in because
you won’t have access to the terminal blocks.

Installation Guide
Step 10.Reconnect the positive/return (+) cables to the RTN terminals.

NOTE: Only feed A and feed B are supported by the PCM. All feeds,
including A2 and B2 are supported by the Quad PCM.
0.624 IN.
0.491 IN.
0.625 IN.
hw0136a
Step 12.Connect the negative/power (–) cables to the –48V terminals according to
local safety codes.
Step 14.Replace the safety covers.
Step 15.Push and seat the PIM to the internal connector and secure in place with
the captive screws; torque to 32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).

Installation Guide
Step 16.Insert the PCM in the PIM slot and secure in place with the captive screws;
torque to 19 lbf·in (2.15 N·m).
hw0167
Step 17.Turn on (close) the customer circuit breaker or fuse that protects the cable
attached to the PIM.
Step 18.Check the feed LEDs on the PCM to verify that power is present: see
section 15.7.

Installation Guide
16.8 Impeller Fan Trays
Caution: Risk of Personal Injury: The fan tray weighs 33 lb (14.9 kg). To reduce the risk of
personal injury, do not attempt to lift the fan tray by yourself. The fan tray should be handled
by two persons.
Note:
• Impeller fan trays are hot-swappable.

• The chassis operates safely while you remove and replace only one tray at a time,
leaving the operational tray in service.
• In the event of a fan failure the fan tray must remain in place until a replacement tray is
ready to be installed at which time the faulty fan tray can be removed and immediately
replaced with the new one.
• In the event of a single impeller fan failure within a fan tray, the entire fan tray must be
replaced.
• To remove and replace impeller fan trays, you must have access to the rear of the
chassis and there must be at least 34.5 in. (87.63 cm) clearance as measured from the
impeller fan-bay door (see Figure 51, point C) to completely pull the fan tray out of the
slot.
16.8.1 Removing and Replacing an Impeller Fan Tray
Caution:
• Do not put your fingers or any tool in a impeller fan tray if the fans are still spinning.
• The impeller fan tray weighs 26.5 lb (12.02 kg).To reduce the risk of personal injury, do
not attempt to lift the impeller fan tray by yourself. The impeller fan tray should be
handled by two persons.

Step 2. Unpack the replacement impeller fan tray from the protective packaging.
Place the replacement impeller fan tray on an anti-static surface.
Step 3. Lift up on the fan-bay cover and open fully until the latch is set.
Step 4. Locate the failed impeller fan tray by checking the LEDs (see section 15.8)
and loosen the captive screws on the impeller fan tray faceplate.

Installation Guide
Step 5. Push and hold the push-button SW for 3 seconds. The blue LED ring will
flash and turn off (Fan Status LED also turns off). When the blue LED ring
turns off, grip the handle and pull the tray out and remove it from the bay.
hw0075
Step 6. Place it on an anti-static surface.

Step 7. Insert the replacement impeller fan tray into the slot until it is fully seated.
Step 8. Secure the tray into place by tightening the captive screws. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 19 lbf·in (2.15 N·m).
Step 9. Verify the operational status of the impeller fan tray using the status LED
indicator.
Step 10.Push the fan-bay cover latch to the side to unlatch it and close the cover.

Installation Guide
16.9 PCM Fans

The fan bay below the PCP supports two PCM fans for redundancy. The PCM fans
support Quad PCMs, which are required to support 4275W APEQs. The cooling fins
in the front of the Quad PCM require the use of PCM Fan Modules. As PCMs are
installed into the chassis from the bottom upward, a cooling channel is created. With
Quad PCMs, the PCM Fan Modules draw air down through this air channel and
exhaust hot air into the APEQ exhaust channel.
16.9.1 Removing and Replacing PCM Fans

Step 2. Unpack the replacement PCM fan from the protective packaging. Place the
replacement PCM fan on an anti-static surface.
Step 3. Locate the failed PCM fan by checking the LEDs (see section 15.9) and
loosen the captive screw on the PCM fan faceplate.
Step 4. Pull the PCM fan out to remove it from the slot.
Step 5. Place it on an anti-static surface.
Step 6. Insert the replacement PCM fan into the slot.
hw0281
Step 7. Push in to seat the connector with the receptacle in the rear of the slot.
Step 8. Secure the PCM fan in place by tightening the captive screw (push in and
turn clockwise). Torque to 10 lbf·in (1.13 N·m).
Step 9. Verify that the replacement PCM fan is operational by checking the LED.

Installation Guide
16.10 CCMs
There are two CCMs located in the top front section of the chassis. To remove and
replace CCMs, see section 16.10.1.
Caution: CPM-A and CCM-A behave as a dependent pair. CCM-A is a functional extension
of CPM-A. Removal, or failure of CCM-A also causes the associated CPM-A to be taken out
of service. Similarly, the same situation exists with CPM-B and CCM-B.
16.10.1 Removing and Replacing CCMs

Step 2. If the CCM you are removing is the active CCM, force a switch over so that
the CCM that is about to be removed is the inactive CCM. Note that the
associated CPM will also switch over.
The activity and status of the CCM can be determined by looking at the
CCM status LED; see section 15.1.1.
Step 3. Shut down the compact flash devices (cf1:, cf2:, and cf3:):
file shutdown standby
Step 4. Lift the front cover to access the CCM cable guide.
hw0138
Step 5. Disconnect all cables from the CCM

Step 6. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the captive screws securing the CCM.
Step 7. To remove the CCM, carefully pull the CCM straight out away from the
chassis until the guide pins are free.
Step 8. Place the CCM on an ESD pad.

Installation Guide
Step 9. Unpack the replacement CCM.

Step 10.Insert the guide pins in place and push the CCM into place until it is fully
seated.
Step 11.Tighten the captive screws to a torque of 32 lbf·in (3.62 N·m).
Step 12.Connect all cables.
Step 13.Close the front cover.
Step 14.Configure the compact flash devices (cf1:, cf2:, and cf3:): for operation:
file standby no shutdown
Step 15.Verify the CCM is operational.
16.10.2 Ejecting Flash Cards

Step 2. You must enter the shutdown command before you remove a flash card
from slot #2 or #3.
Command: file shutdown cflash-id
Example: file shutdown cf3:
Step 3. Push the ejector button for Compact Flash Slot #3. The card will partially
pop out of the slot.
Step 4. Remove the card and place it in an anti-static bag.
Note: You must install the flash card containing the boot and configuration
files in Compact Flash Slot #3 (cf3:) on the CCM.

Installation Guide
16.11 Cable Guides

There are two front cable guides on the 7950 XRS-20e chassis and two sets of rear
cables guides on the 7950 XRS-40 chassis, see section 11.1.
Figure 138 Front Cable Guides
hw0080

Installation Guide
Table 111 Front Cable Guides
Key Description
A Upper front cable guide

B Lower front cable guide
16.11.1 Removing and Replacing Cable Guides

Step 2. Remove all cables from the cable guide.
Step 3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws holding the cable guide in
place.
Step 4. Remove and save the screws.
Step 5. Remove the cable guide.
Step 6. Unpack the replacement cable guide.
Step 7. Mount the cable guide in place and secure it with the screws. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 7 lbf·in (0.79 N·m).
Note: For more information about installing 7950 XRS-40 rear cable guides;
see section 11.1.
16.12 Protection Panels

For information about how to remove and replace optional protection panels,
see section 18.

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Pin Assignments
Installation Guide
17 Pin Assignments
• CCM Port Types, section 17.1
• BITS Cable Connector, section 17.1.2
• RS-232 - DTE Mode, section 17.1.3
• RS-232 - DCE Mode, section 17.1.4
• Alarm Port Cable Connector, section 17.1.5
• Ethernet Management Cable Connector, section 17.1.6
17.1 CCM Port Types

Figure 139 CCM Port Types
XRS20_42
• A Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) is a clock in a central office that

supplies a common frequency reference to all synchronous network
elements in that office. The BITS port on CCM front panel allows the router
to be connected to such a timing supply unit. The port uses an RJ-48C
connector and has both input and output signals. An appropriate cable must
be used to break out the input and output signals and to provide connection
to the timing supply unit. The port supports both T1 and E1 signaling formats.

Pin Assignments 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
• You can use the RS-232 port as either a data terminal equipment (DTE) or a
data communications equipment (DCE) port.
Set the switch to DTE when connecting to the serial port of a PC with a null
modem cable. Set the switch to DCE when connecting to the serial port of a
PC with a straight-through cable.
The port is configured as DTE or DCE depending on the switch setting. No
crossover cables are required.
• The Optical Extension Shelf (OES) management ports:
− OES1 is used for the GMPLS-UNI IP Control Channel.
− OES2 is reserved for future functionality.
• The Alarm port is provisioned as terminal blocks and is used to connect to
external alarm devices that report conditions that trigger red or amber alarms.
You must provide an appropriate cable configured according to the your
alarm panel.
• The Management port is a 10/100 Ethernet port used to download images
and manage the system.
This port is provisioned with an RJ-45 jack on the front panel. You must
provide a CAT6 Ethernet cable to connect to the port.
Note: Use shielded cabling for all CCM port connections.
17.1.1 OES Ports Pinout
Table 112 OES1 and OES2 Ports— RJ-48C Female
Pin Signal Direction Description
1 TX+ Output Differential transmit data - positive

2 TX- Output Differential transmit data - negative
3 RX+ Input Differential receive data - positive
4 NC — Not connected
6 RX- Input Differential receive data - negative

Installation Guide
Table 112 OES1 and OES2 Ports— RJ-48C Female (Continued) (Continued)
17.1.2 BITS Cable Connector
Note: The BITS input port comprises the Receive Ring Signal and Receive Tip Signal. The
BITS output port comprises the Transmit Ring Signal and Transmit Tip signals.
Table 113 BITS Port — RJ-48C Female
1 RXRING Input Receive Ring Signal

2 RXTIP Input Receive Tip Signal
4 TXRING Output Transmit Ring Signal
5 TXTIP Output Transmit Tip Signal

Installation Guide
17.1.3 RS-232 - DTE Mode

Use these pin assignments when the DTE/DCE switch on the CCM front panel is set
to DTE.
Table 114 Data Terminal — DTE Mode — RS-232 Port
1 RTS Output Request to send

2 DTR Output Data terminal ready
3 TXD Output Transmit data
4 GND Signal ground Signal ground
5 GND Signal ground Signal ground
6 RXD Input Receive data
7 DSR Input Data set ready
8 CTS Input Clear to send
17.1.4 RS-232 - DCE Mode

Use these pin assignments when the DTE/DCE switch on the CCM front panel is set
to DCE.
Table 115 Data Terminal — DCE Mode — RS-232 Port
1 CTS Output Clear to send

2 DSR Output Data set ready
3 RXD Output Receive data
4 GND — Signal ground
5 GND — Signal ground
6 TXD Input Transmit data
7 DTR Input Data terminal ready

Installation Guide
Table 115 Data Terminal — DCE Mode — RS-232 Port (Continued)
8 RTS Input Request to send
17.1.5 Alarm Port Cable Connector

Figure 140 Alarm Ports
A B C
Alarms
Critical
Major
Minor
hw0139
Table 116 specifies alarm terminal connector pin assignments. Examples of critical
alarms include a fan failure, a power supply over-temperature condition, and a power
supply failure. The major alarm LED can illuminate when a power supply is removed.
There are no conditions defined for minor alarms.
Table 116 Alarm Terminal Connectors
Pin (Key) Signal Direction Description
Critical Alarm
Left (A) CRIT_NORM_CLOSED Output Critical alarm normally
closed
Center (B) CRIT_COMMON Output Critical alarm common

Installation Guide
Table 116 Alarm Terminal Connectors (Continued)
Pin (Key) Signal Direction Description
Right (C) CRIT_NORM_OPEN Output Critical alarm normally

open
Major Alarm
closed
open
Minor Alarm
closed
open
17.1.6 Ethernet Management Cable Connector
Table 117 10/100Mbs. Management Ethernet Port — RJ-45 Female
1 TX+ Output Differential transmit data — positive

2 TX– Output Differential transmit data — negative
3 RX+ Input Differential receive data — positive

Installation Guide
Table 117 10/100Mbs. Management Ethernet Port — RJ-45 Female
6 RX– Input Differential receive data - negative

Table 118 1000Mbs. Management Ethernet Port — RJ-45 Female
1 TRD0+ Bidirectional Differential Bidirectional Data Positive

2 TRD0– Bidirectional Differential Bidirectional Data Negative
Note: The OES management port pin assignments are the same as those specified in
Table 117.

Installation Guide

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Protection Panels
Installation Guide
18 Protection Panels
The front and rear protection panels provide EMI shielding (to meet FCC
requirements) as well as physical protection for fiber optic cables.
• Before You Begin, section 18.1

• Installing Front Protection Panels, section 18.2
• Installing Rear Protection Panels, section 18.3
18.1 Before You Begin

• Ensure that the chassis is securely installed, and grounded.
• Verify that nearby equipment, including breaker panel bus bars and power
connectors, is made safe. Either shut off the power, if possible, or install
safety guards or mats over exposed power points and cables.
18.1.1 Required Hardware And Tools

• 7950 XRS-20e front protection panel kit (3HE11091AA): includes protection
panel, mounting brackets, catches, and screws
• 7950 XRS-20e rear protection panel kit (3HE11092AA): includes protection
panel, mounting brackets, catches, and screws
• #2 Phillips screwdriver and torque driver
• 5/16 hex driver for the shelf locking nuts
18.2 Installing Front Protection Panels

This section includes information about attaching brackets and catches, and
mounting the front panels to the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis using the
items found in the front protection panel kit (3HE11091AA).

Protection Panels 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
Installation Guide
18.2.1 Front Panel on 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40

Step 1. Locate and collect four catches and screws from the 7950 XRS-20e front
protection panel kit.
Step 2. Attach the catches to the front chassis posts. Tighten the screws to 13 lbf·in
(1.47 N·m).
Figure 141 Attaching Catches to Front Chassis Posts
hw0065

Installation Guide
Step 3. Remove the protective film (A) from the front panel window.
Figure 142 Removing Protective Film from Front Window
hw0160

Installation Guide
Step 4. Mount the front panel to the chassis.
Figure 143 Mounting Front Panel
hw0066

Installation Guide
Step 5. Secure the front panel. Hand tighten the screws to 15 lbf·in (1.69 N·m)
Figure 144 Securing Front Panel
hw0067

Installation Guide
18.3 Installing Rear Protection Panels

This section includes information about attaching brackets and catches, and
mounting the front panels to the 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 chassis using the
items found in the rear protection panel kit (3HE11092AA):
18.3.1 Rear Panel on 7950 XRS-20e Chassis
Step 1. Locate and collect the following items in the rear protection panel kit:
− four obround mounting brackets
− eight 8-32 flat-head screws
− four catches
Step 2. Attach the catches to the obround brackets using 8-32 flat-head screws.
Tighten the screws to 22 lbf·in (2.47 N·m).
hw0169

Installation Guide
Step 3. Attach the catches to the rear chassis posts. Tighten the screws to 13 lbf·in
(1.47 N·m).
Figure 145 Attaching Catches to Rear 7950 XRS-20e Chassis Posts
hw0157

Installation Guide
Step 4. Remove the protective film (A) from the rear panel window.
Figure 146 Removing Protective Film from Rear Window
hw0161

Installation Guide
Step 5. Mount the rear panel to the chassis.
Figure 147 Mounting Rear Panel to 7950 XRS-20e Chassis
hw0158

Installation Guide
Step 6. Secure the rear panel. Hand tighten the screws to 15 lbf·in (1.69 N·m).
Figure 148 Securing Rear Panel to 7950 XRS-20e Chassis
hw0159

Installation Guide
18.3.2 Rear Panel on 7950 XRS-40 Chassis

Step 1. Locate and collect the following items in the rear protection panel kit:
− four large mounting brackets
− eight 8-32 flat-head screws
− four catches
Step 2. Attach the catches to the brackets using 8-32 flat-head screws. Tighten the
screws to 22 lbf·in (2.47 N·m).
XRS40_6
Step 3. Attach the rear brackets to the 7950 XRS-40 chassis. Tighten the screws to
48 lbf·in (5.42 N·m).
Refer to Table 119 to determine to correct location of each rear bracket.
Table 119 The 7950 XRS-40 Rear Brackets
Part number Location (rear view)
87-3776-01 lower (right and left)

87-3777-01 upper (right and left)
Note: The locations referenced in Table 119 are based on looking at the chassis from the
rear, not the front.

Installation Guide
Figure 149 Attaching Catches to Rear 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Posts
hw0152

Installation Guide
Step 4. Remove the protective film (A) from the rear panel windows.
Figure 150 Removing Protective Film from Rear Windows
hw0161

Installation Guide
Step 5. Mount the rear panels to the 7950 XRS-40 chassis.
Figure 151 Mounting Rear Panels to 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
hw0153

Installation Guide
Step 6. Secure the rear panels to the 7950 XRS-40 chassis. Hand tighten the
screws to 15 lbf·in (1.69 N·m).
Figure 152 Securing Rear Panels to 7950 XRS-40 Chassis
hw0154
Note: If necessary, adjust brackets to allow smooth tightening of screw into catch.

Installation Guide

Customer Document and Product Support
Customer documentation
Customer Documentation Welcome Page
Product manuals and documentation updates are available at Nokia.com. If you are a new
user and require access to this service, please contact your Nokia sales representative.
Technical Support
Customer Documentation Technical Support
Documentation feedback
Customer Documentation Feedback
© 2019 Nokia. All rights reserved.
3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA

3HE12096AAABTQZZA01 - V1 - 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide Release 19.7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3HE12096AAABTQZZA01 - V1 - 7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide Release 19.7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40 Chassis Installation Guide

7950 Extensible Routing

7950 XRS-20e and 7950 XRS-40

3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA

Nokia — Proprietary and confidential.

Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company

All specifications, procedures, and information in this document are subject to

© 2019 Nokia. All rights reserved.

2 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

2 Regulatory and Customer Requirements .................... 23

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 3

2.9.1 ACMA Regulations .................................................................... 40

3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

4 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

4 Intelligent Power Management ................................... 111

5 System Specifications................................................. 129

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 5

6 Site Preparation ........................................................... 141

7 Installing and Grounding the Chassis ....................... 171

8 Installing APEQs and Connecting Power ................. 195

6 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

8.3.2 Connecting DC Power ............................................................. 198

9 Installing CPMs and SFMs .......................................... 217

10 Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs ........................... 227

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 7

11 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling ..................... 253

12 Establishing Router Connections .............................. 275

13 7950 XRS-20e System Bring-Up ................................. 279

14 7950 XRS-40 System Bring-Up ................................... 283

8 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

15.5 C-XMA/XMA LEDs .................................................................. 304

16 Field-Replaceable Units .............................................. 317

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 9

17 Pin Assignments.......................................................... 355

18 Protection Panels ........................................................ 363

10 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

2 Regulatory and Customer Requirements .................... 23

3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 11

5 System Specifications................................................. 129

6 Site Preparation ........................................................... 141

7 Installing and Grounding the Chassis ....................... 171

8 Installing APEQs and Connecting Power ................. 195

12 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

9 Installing CPMs and SFMs .......................................... 217

10 Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs ........................... 227

12 Establishing Router Connections .............................. 275

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 13

16 Field-Replaceable Units .............................................. 317

17 Pin Assignments.......................................................... 355

18 Protection Panels ........................................................ 363

14 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

3 System Overview ........................................................... 47

Edition: 01 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA 15

Figure 43 40-port 10 GE SFP+ XMA ....................................................... 102

4 Intelligent Power Management ................................... 111

6 Site Preparation ........................................................... 141

7 Installing and Grounding the Chassis ....................... 171

8 Installing APEQs and Connecting Power ................. 195

16 3HE 12096 AAAB TQZZA Edition: 01

9 Installing CPMs and SFMs .......................................... 217

10 Installing XCMs and C-XMAs/XMAs ........................... 227

11 7950 XRS-40 Connections and Cabling ..................... 253